Sony Pmw Td300 Operating Instructions

PMW-TD300 - Operating Instructions PMW-TD300_OM Free User Guide for Sony Camcorder, Manual - page6

2015-08-20

: Sony Sony-Pmw-Td300-Operating-Instructions-797255 sony-pmw-td300-operating-instructions-797255 sony pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 182 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

4-408-371-11 (1)
© 2011 Sony Corporation
Solid-State Memory
3D Camcorder
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly
and retain it for future reference.
PMW-TD300
2
Important Safety Instructions
• Read these instructions.
• Keep these instructions.
• Heed all warnings.
• Follow all instructions.
• Do not use this apparatus near water.
• Clean only with dry cloth.
• Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
• Do not install near any heat sources such
as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
• Do not defeat the safety purpose of the
polarized or grounding-type plug. A
polarized plug has two blades with one
wider than the other. A grounding-type
plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong
are provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of
the obsolete outlet.
• Protect the power cord from being walked
on or pinched particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
• Only use attachments/accessories
specified by the manufacturer.
• Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
• Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
• Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or
moisture, does not operate normally, or
has been dropped.
To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, do not
expose this apparatus to
rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock,
do not open the cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must
obey the law in the relative area or country.
When installing the installation space must
be secured in consideration of the ventilation
and service operation.
• Do not block the ventilation slots at the left
side and right side panels, and vents of
the fans.
• Leave a space around the unit for
ventilation.
• Leave more than 40 cm of space in the
rear of the unit to secure the operation
area.
When the unit is installed on the desk or the
like, leave at least 4 cm of space in the left
and right sides. Leaving 40 cm or more of
space above the unit is recommended for
service operation.
CAUTION
The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing. No objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the
apparatus.
WARNING
Excessive sound pressure from earphones
and headphones can cause hearing loss.
WARNING
3
In order to use this product safely, avoid
prolonged listening at excessive sound
pressure levels.
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive
heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
For the customers in the U.S.A.
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
All interface cables used to connect
peripherals must be shielded in order to
comply with the limits for a digital device
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC
Rules.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
For the customers in Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
For the customers in Europe
This product with the CE marking complies
with the EMC Directive issued by the
Commission of the European Community.
Compliance with this directive implies
conformity to the following European
standards:
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference
(Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic
Susceptibility (Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the
following Electromagnetic Environments: E1
(residential), E2 (commercial and light
industrial), E3 (urban outdoors), E4
(controlled EMC environment, ex. TV
studio).
The manufacturer of this product is Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku,
Tokyo, Japan.
The Authorized Representative for EMC and
product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH,
Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart,
Germany. For any service or guarantee
matters please refer to the addresses given
in separate service or guarantee documents.
For the State of California, USA only
Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery
contains perchlorate.
For the customers in Taiwan only
Table of Contents
4
Foreword .................................................................................................... 10
Before Use....................................................................................... 10
Chapter 1 : Overview
Features ...................................................................................................... 11
3D Images ................................................................................................... 13
Using the Software..................................................................................... 17
Reading the CD-ROM Manuals............................................................... 17
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls...................................... 18
Power Supply .................................................................................. 18
Accessory Attachments................................................................... 19
Operating and Connectors Section.................................................. 20
Monochrome LCD Panel ................................................................ 31
Viewfinder....................................................................................... 32
Viewfinder Screen Display........................................................................ 33
Chapter 2 : Preparations
Preparing a Power Supply ........................................................................ 37
Using a Battery Pack....................................................................... 37
Using AC Power ............................................................................. 38
Attaching the Viewfinder .......................................................................... 38
Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder................................................. 38
Adjusting the Viewfinder Position.................................................. 39
Adjusting the Viewfinder Angle..................................................... 39
Lifting Up the Viewfinder Barrel and Eyepiece ............................. 39
Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen................................... 41
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket ........................ 41
Attaching a CBK-VF01 Viewfinder ............................................... 42
Attaching a 5-inch Electronic Viewfinder ...................................... 43
Setting the Area of Use.............................................................................. 44
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock ........................................... 45
Preparing the Audio Input System .......................................................... 45
Connecting a Microphone to the MIC IN Connector...................... 45
Connecting Microphones to the AUDIO IN Connectors................ 46
Table of Contents
Table of Contents 5
Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a UHF Wireless Microphone
System) ..................................................................................... 47
Tripod Mounting ....................................................................................... 48
Connecting a Video Light ......................................................................... 49
Using the Shoulder Strap .......................................................................... 49
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position ....................................................... 50
Chapter 3 : Adjustments and Settings
Setting the Video Format .......................................................................... 51
Changing the Video Format............................................................ 52
Selecting 3D or 2D Mode........................................................................... 52
Selecting 3D or 2D.......................................................................... 52
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance............................. 53
Adjusting the Black Balance........................................................... 53
Adjusting the White Balance .......................................................... 54
Setting the Electronic Shutter................................................................... 56
Shutter Modes ................................................................................. 56
Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed............................... 56
Adjusting the Iris ....................................................................................... 58
Changing the Adjustment Mode ..................................................... 58
Adjusting the Iris using the IRIS Dial............................................. 58
Adjusting the Iris using Automatic Iris Adjustment ....................... 58
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment...... 58
Zooming ...................................................................................................... 59
Using the ZOOM Dial..................................................................... 59
Using the Zoom Lever .................................................................... 59
Adjusting the Focus ................................................................................... 60
Adjusting in MF Mode.................................................................... 60
Adjusting in AF Mode .................................................................... 61
Adjusting the Convergence....................................................................... 61
Adjusting using the CONVERGENCE Dial................................... 61
Adjusting using the AUTO CONVERGENCE Button................... 62
Adjusting using the Assignable Switches ....................................... 62
Changing the Viewfinder Display ............................................................ 62
Adjusting the Audio Level ........................................................................ 63
Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs from the
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 Connectors ......................................... 63
Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the MIC IN Connector.... 63
Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4 ........................................... 64
Table of Contents
6
Setting the Time Data................................................................................ 65
Setting the Timecode....................................................................... 65
Setting the User Bits........................................................................ 66
Synchronizing the Timecode........................................................... 66
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information
(Status Screens).................................................................................... 68
Chapter 4 : Shooting
Handling SxS Memory Cards................................................................... 70
About SxS Memory Cards .............................................................. 70
Loading and Ejecting SxS Memory Cards...................................... 71
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to Use.......................................... 72
Formatting (Initializing) SxS Memory Cards ................................. 73
Checking the Remaining Recording Time...................................... 73
Restoring SxS Memory Cards......................................................... 74
Basic Operations ........................................................................................ 75
Playing Recorded Clips................................................................... 76
Deleting Recorded Clips ................................................................. 77
Advanced Operations ................................................................................ 77
Recording Shot Marks..................................................................... 77
Setting OK Marks ........................................................................... 77
Starting to Record from Pre-stored Video (Picture Cache Function)
(2D mode only)......................................................................... 78
Recording Time-lapse Video (Interval Rec Function).................... 79
Shooting Stop Motion Animations (Frame Rec Function) ............. 80
Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion ............................................. 82
Framing Shots with the Freeze Mix Function................................. 83
Planning Metadata Operations ................................................................ 84
Loading a Planning Metadata File into Camcorder’s
Internal Memory ....................................................................... 84
Defining Clip Names in Planning Metadata ................................... 85
Defining Shot Mark Names in Planning Metadata ......................... 86
3D Shooting Guide Function..................................................................... 87
Displaying the Subject Distance Range .......................................... 87
Displaying 3D Depth Warning........................................................ 87
Displaying the Grid......................................................................... 88
Table of Contents 7
Chapter 5 : Clip Operations
Clip Playback ............................................................................................. 89
Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................... 89
Playing Clips ................................................................................... 91
Using Thumbnails to Search Inside Clips....................................... 92
Thumbnail Operations .............................................................................. 93
THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration............................................... 93
Basic THUMBNAIL Menu Operations.......................................... 94
Changing the Thumbnail Screen Type............................................ 94
Displaying Clip Properties .............................................................. 95
Adding and Deleting OK Marks ..................................................... 96
Copying Clips ................................................................................. 96
Deleting Clips.................................................................................. 97
Displaying the Expand Thumbnail Screen...................................... 98
Displaying the Shot Mark Thumbnail Screen................................. 98
Adding and Deleting Shot Marks.................................................... 99
Changing Clip Index Pictures ......................................................... 99
Chapter 6 : Menu and Detailed Settings
Setup Menu Organization and Levels.................................................... 100
Setup Menu Organization ............................................................. 100
Setup Menu Levels........................................................................ 100
Basic Setup Menu Operations ................................................................ 101
Menu List.................................................................................................. 104
OPERATION Menu...................................................................... 104
PAINT Menu................................................................................. 122
MAINTENANCE Menu ............................................................... 127
FILE Menu.................................................................................... 140
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches ......................................... 142
Functions that can be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch ........... 142
Functions that can be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch ........... 143
Functions that can be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches,
the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the COLOR TEMP.
Button...................................................................................... 143
Functions that can be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 6 Switch ........... 145
Functions that can be Assigned to the RET Button ...................... 145
Assigning Functions to the Lens Dials ................................................... 146
Functions that can be Assigned to the Lens Dials......................... 146
Table of Contents
8
Chapter 7 : Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Saving and Loading Settings................................................................... 147
Saving Setting Data....................................................................... 147
Loading Setting Data..................................................................... 148
Resetting a File after Changing Its Contents................................. 148
Saving and Loading Scene Files ............................................................. 149
Saving Scene Files ........................................................................ 149
Loading Scene Files ...................................................................... 149
Chapter 8 : Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitors ............................................................... 151
Operating Clips with a Computer.......................................................... 153
Using the ExpressCard Slot of a Computer .................................. 153
USB Connection with a Computer................................................ 153
Editing 3D Clips using MPES-3D01 ...................................................... 155
Chapter 9 : Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder............................................................................ 156
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 156
Cleaning the Viewfinder ............................................................... 156
Note about the Battery Terminal................................................... 156
Adjusting Left/Right Lens Errors.......................................................... 157
Correcting at a Single Point .......................................................... 157
Correcting at Multiple Points........................................................ 157
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length............................................... 158
Operation Warnings................................................................................ 159
Error Indication............................................................................. 159
Warning Indication........................................................................ 160
Appendix
Important Notes on Operation ............................................................... 166
Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock ...................................... 168
Specifications............................................................................................ 169
General.......................................................................................... 169
Camera Block................................................................................ 169
Audio Block .................................................................................. 170
Table of Contents 9
Display .......................................................................................... 170
Media Block.................................................................................. 170
Inputs/Outputs............................................................................... 170
Lens Block .................................................................................... 171
Supplied Accessories .................................................................... 171
Recommended Additional Equipment .......................................... 171
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories .................................. 173
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License............................................... 174
About Bitmap Fonts ................................................................................ 174
About OpenSSL ....................................................................................... 175
Index.......................................................................................................... 178
Foreword
10
After purchasing the PMW-TD300 Solid-State
Memory 3D Camcorder, before operating, it is
necessary to set the area of use.
(Unless this setting is made, the camcorder will
not operate.)
For details of these settings, see “Setting the Area of
Use” (page 44).
Note
Before attaching/removing optional components or
accessories to/from the PMW-TD300 (referred to as “the
camcorder”), be sure to turn the power of the camcorder
off.
Viewing 3D Video
• Viewing 3D video shot using this camcorder on
a 3D monitor can cause symptoms of
discomfort, such as eye fatigue, tiredness, or
nausea. It is recommended that you take regular
rest breaks when watching 3D video. The
duration and frequency of required rest breaks
will vary from person to person, so each person
must judge for themselves. If discomfort
occurs, stop watching 3D video until the
symptoms subside, and consult your doctor if
necessary. Also, please follow the instructions
provided with the software or the hardware
connected to the camcorder. Furthermore, the
sense of vision of young children (especially
children less than 6 years of age) is still in a
development stage. Before allowing young
children to view 3D video, please consult a
pediatrician or ophthalmologist. A responsible
adult should always supervise any children to
observe the above-mentioned precautions.
• The perception of 3D video varies depending on
the individual.
Foreword
Before Use
Features 11
Chapter 1 Overview
The camcorder is a shoulder-mount HD memory
camcorder featuring independent Left/Right, 1/2-
type (diagonal 8 mm (11/32 inches)), full-HD
(1920 × 1080) “Exmor” 3CMOS image sensors.
Dual, fixed lens system
Employs a dual, fixed-type lens that requires no
Left/Right-lens optical axis, angle of view, or
image quality adjustments, so you can start
shooting straight away.
Convergence control
The all-important convergence point can be
adjusted between approximately 1.2 m (lens
surface reference) and infinity for 3D image
representation. When shooting, you can align the
convergence point with the focus position using
one-button control.
Also, the inter-axial distance is a fixed 45 mm,
allowing wide-scope 3D images to be captured.
Unique triple dial operation
The camcorder employs a unique triple dial for
adjusting zoom, iris, and convergence, and which
synchronizes the operation of both the left and
right lens.
The function assigned to each dial can also be
customized.
3D shooting guide function
This displays a guide in the viewfinder of the
appropriate distance to the subject in order to
avoid viewer discomfort due to the parallax
between the left and right lens becoming too
large. It can also display a warning if the parallax
at the subject becomes too large. These allow the
shooting of more natural 3D images that can be
viewed comfortably.
Also, you can view 3D images in the viewfinder
using the naked eye, and the camcorder supports
various display formats for checking anaglyph
and other parallax.
3D image output to external devices
It is equipped with dual HD-SDI outputs, and can
output individual Left/Right image signals.
Furthermore, one output also supports 3G-SDI
for output of both left and right image signals
paired together.
3D images can also be output in side-by-side
format from HDMI and HD-SDI connectors.
SxS memory cards as recording media
The camcorder employs the high-performance
SxS memory cards used in XDCAM EX-series
equipment as the storage media. The left and right
images are synchronized and recorded onto two
SxS memory cards. There are four memory card
slots, two each on both the left and right, allowing
recording across two memory cards.
Approximately 6 hours of 3D images can be
recorded when loaded with four 64 GB SxS
memory cards.
Light weight, low power consumption
Design features such as CMOS image sensors,
custom video signal processing ICs, and SxS
memory card recording enable operation at power
consumption of 32 W or less. The camcorder’s
light weight (5.5 kg (12 lb 2 oz)) and low center
of gravity make it easy to carry on the shoulder
while ensuring superior stability.
HD recording using the “MPEG-2 Long
GOP” codec
The camcorder records 1920 × 1080, 1440 ×
1080, and 1280 × 720 HD images using “MPEG-
2 Long GOP” codec compression. It offers a
choice of bit rates: either 35 Mbps (HQ mode) or
25 Mbps (SP mode).
By utilizing an efficient compression format, the
camcorder records high-quality HD images for
long recording time of approx. 200 minutes at
Chapter1Overview
Features
Features
12
Chapter 1 Overview
35 Mbps (HQ mode) or approx. 280 minutes at
25 Mbps (SP mode) on a single 64-GB SxS
memory card.
Multi-format support
The camcorder supports interlace format
recording (1080/59.94i or 1080/50i), progressive
format recording (1080/29.97P, 1080/23.98P,
720/59.94P, 720/29.97P, 720/23.98P, or 1080/
25P, 720/50P, 720/25P), thus offering the
flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording.
(For 23.98P, native frequency recording is
possible.)
It also can output HD signals down-converted to
SD.
A variety of functions for improved
performance under various shooting
conditions
• Optical ND filters and electrical CC filters
• Hyper gamma
• Slow shutter function
• Frame Recording function
• Time lapse function (interval recording)
• Slow & quick motion function
• Freeze mix function
• Focus magnification function
• Assignable switches
• 3.5-inch high-resolution color LCD viewfinder
• Remote control
• 2D shooting mode
Wireless LAN support
You can connect this camcorder to a computer
over a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi connection) by
connecting the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi
Adapter to the external device connector.
A Wi-Fi connection allows you to transfer
planning metadata from a computer to this
camcorder, and to transfer clips and other files
from this camcorder to a computer. You can also
use the Live Logging function to transfer proxy
AV data to a computer as you shoot, for logging
of the video currently being shot.
Inherits unique features of XDCAM EX
series
The camcorder inherits the workflow features of
the XDCAM EX series, including thumbnail
display and metadata management, and improves
them by introducing an improved man-machine
interface.
XDCAM EX web sites
For information on XDCAM EX, visit the
following web sites:
United States
http://www.sony.com/xdcamex
Canada
http://www.sony.ca/xdcamex
Europe, Middle East, Africa, and Russia
http://www.sonybiz.net/xdcamex
Latin America
http://www.sonypro-latin.com/xdcamex
Australia
http://www.sony.com.au/xdcamex
Asia (except Korea, China, and Japan)
http://pro.sony-asia.com
Korea
http://bp.sony.co.kr/xdcamex
China
http://pro.sony.com.cn/minisite/XDCAMEX
Japan
http://www.sony.co.jp/XDCAMEX
3D Images 13
Chapter 1 Overview
When people look at objects, the left eye and right eye view the object at a slightly different angle, and
hence the images projected in the left and right eye are different. The difference in images seen by the left
and right eye is called parallax.
By composing a picture in the head from the left and right eye images, people gain an awareness of depth
and stereoscopic effect.
3D images utilize this technique to display subjects in three dimensions. When shooting 3D images, lenses
substitute for the left eye and right eye to shoot subjects at a slightly different angle.
During playback, the right lens image is viewed by the right eye only and likewise for the left lens image,
and hence a three-dimensional subject is recognized in the minds of the viewers.
3D Images
Left eye image Right eye image
Subject recognition
3D Images
14
Chapter 1 Overview
Convergence Point
When shooting using individual left and right lenses, the point where the optical axes of the left lens and
right lens intersect is called the convergence point. The difference (parallax) between left and right images
for subjects at the convergence point is zero. During playback, subjects at the convergence point appear
to viewers to be positioned right on the screen. Subjects in front of the convergence point appear to pop
out of the screen, while subjects behind the convergence point appear to recede into the distance.
Accordingly, it is essential to set the convergence point appropriately when shooting in order to effectively
create the popping out and receding sensation during playback.
The camcorder convergence point can be adjusted in the range 1.2 m (4 ft) to ∞ (infinity). You can set the
convergence point to the focus position using a single button push, store multiple convergence points, and
recall convergence points when shooting. (see page 61)
Comfortable 3D Images
For subjects displaced from the convergence point, the parallax becomes larger as the distance from the
convergence point becomes larger. In other words, the closer the subject the more it will appear to pop
out, and the further away the more it will appear to recede into the distance. If the parallax becomes too
large, it becomes difficult for the viewer to combine the left and right images, and not only will the 3D
image appear unnatural but it may also cause eye fatigue and discomfort while viewing. Therefore, in
order to shoot comfortable 3D images for the viewer, it is essential to keep the size of parallax within an
appropriate range.
3D Images 15
Chapter 1 Overview
Parallax Guidelines
To shoot comfortable 3D images, we recommend the following points as parallax guidelines.
Parallax angle should be less than 1°
The parallax angle (
θ
) is obtained by subtracting the angle (
α
or
β
) between the left/right lenses at the
subject position from the angle (
γ
) between the left/right lenses at the convergence point, where the
optical axes of the left/right lenses intersect. The parallax angle is negative for subjects that appear to pop
out of the screen, and positive for subjects that appear to recede into the distance. The parallax angle for
comfortable 3D images is less than ±1°.
Since measuring the parallax angle is difficult when shooting, it is common to display an overlay of the
left and right images on a screen and check the size of the image mismatch (amount of parallax). When
images are viewed from a distance approximately 3 times the height of the screen, the amount of parallax
on the screen due to a parallax angle of 1° is roughly 3% of the screen width. When shooting, this guideline
translates into keeping the amount of parallax within 3% of the viewfinder screen width in order to
produce natural stereoscopic images.
Amount of parallax on the screen should not exceed space between eyes
When the amount of parallax on the screen exceeds the distance between the eyes of the viewer, it
becomes impossible to form the left and right images into a single image, making the viewer feel
discomfort. Since the space between the eyes is an individual trait, a rule of thumb is to keep amount of
parallax on the screen to less than 5 cm (2 inches). If the screen is small (77-inch type or smaller),
maintaining a parallax angle of less than 1° ensures that the amount of parallax cannot exceed 5 cm
(2 inches). However, if the screen is large (77-inch type or larger), the amount of parallax on the screen
becomes larger as the screen becomes larger, and it becomes easy to exceed the 5 cm (2 inches) guideline.
Consequently, it is important to consider the screen size when shooting.
α
γ
β
α
Parallax angle
θ
=
γ
–
α
(or
β
)
Amount of parallax
Convergence point
3D Images
16
Chapter 1 Overview
The camcorder displays the subject distance from the camera in the viewfinder as an aid to keeping the
parallax within an appropriate range. The viewfinder can also display a colored outline of the subject as a
warning when the parallax is large and natural stereoscopic vision of the subject is difficult. You can set
the amount of parallax as a percentage of the screen width (near field, far field) or you can specify the
maximum screen size as the reference for displaying the guide functions. (see page 87)
Using the Software / Reading the CD-ROM Manuals 17
Chapter 1 Overview
The supplied CD-ROM (labeled “Utility
Software for XDCAM”) contains application and
device driver software required to access to SxS
memory cards from a computer and to manage
material shot with the camcorder.
Information about how to install the software is
provided in PDF format.
Note
You must install the SxS device driver on your computer
if your computer is equipped with an ExpressCard slot
and you want to use it to access SxS memory cards.
Preparations
The following program must be installed on your
computer in order to read the documents
contained on the CD-ROM.
Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher
Memo
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it
from the following URL:
http://www.adobe.com/
Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
To read the documents
Do the following:
1Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM
drive.
A cover page appears automatically in your
browser.
If it does not appear automatically in the
browser, double-click on the index.htm file
on the CD-ROM.
2Select and click on the manual that you
wish to read.
This opens the PDF file.
Memo
The files may not be displayed properly, depending on
the version of Adobe Reader. In such a case, install the
latest version you can download from the URL
mentioned in “Preparations” above.
Note
If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you can
purchase a new one to replace it. Contact a Sony service
representative.
Using the Software Reading the CD-ROM
Manuals
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
18
Chapter 1 Overview
aLIGHT switch
Determines how a video light connected to the
LIGHT connector (see page 19) is turned on and
off.
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video
light is in the on position, the video light is
turned on automatically while the camcorder
is recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off
manually, using its own switch.
Note
When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache
mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before
operation to start recording is carried out (or while data
is being stored in memory).
bPOWER switch
Turns the main power supply on and off.
cDC IN (DC power input) connector
(XLR type, 4-pin, male)
To operate the camcorder from an AC power
supply, connect an optional DC power cord to this
terminal and then connect the cord to the DC
output terminal of the BC-L70, BC-L160, or
another battery charger.
dDC OUT 12 V (DC power output)
connector (4-pin, female)
Supplies power for an optional WRR-860C/861/
862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
(maximum 0.5 A).
Note
Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF
synthesized diversity tuner.
eBattery attachment shoe
Attach a BP-GL95A/L80S/L60S Battery Pack.
Alternatively, you can attach an AC-DN2B/
DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the camcorder on
AC power supply.
For details, see “Preparing a Power Supply”
(page 37).
For details, see “Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner
(for a UHF Wireless Microphone System)”
(page 47).
Note
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following
battery packs: BP-GL95A, BP-L60S, and BP-L80S.
Locations and Functions
of Parts and Controls
Power Supply
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 19
Chapter 1 Overview
aShoulder strap fitting
Attach the supplied shoulder strap (see page 49).
bAccessory fitting shoe
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light
(see page 49).
cViewfinder front-to-back positioning
lever
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-to-
back direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK
knob. After adjustment, retighten this lever and
the LOCK knob.
dViewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Loosen this ring to adjust the left-to-right position
of the viewfinder (see page 39).
eViewfinder fitting shoe
Attach the viewfinder.
fVF (viewfinder) connector (26-pin,
rectangular)
Connect the cable of the supplied viewfinder or
optional CBK-VF01 viewfinder.
gVF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin,
round)
Connect the cable of the optional DXF-series
viewfinder.
For connecting the DXF-series devices, optional
parts are required. Consult a Sony service
representative for information about connecting the
DXF-51 or DXF-C50W.
hViewfinder front-to-back positioning
knob (LOCK knob)
Loosen this knob to adjust the front-to-back
position of the viewfinder (see page 39).
iFitting for optional microphone holder
Fit an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder (see
page 46).
jShoulder pad
Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the
position in the front-to-rear direction. Adjust the
position for maximum convenience when
operating the camcorder on your shoulder (see
page 50).
kLIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin,
female)
A video light with a maximum power
consumption of 50 W, such as the Anton Bauer
Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected (see
page 49).
lMIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V)
connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female)
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.
mTripod mount
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the
tripod adaptor (optional).
Accessory Attachments
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
20
Chapter 1 Overview
Lens Block (left side)
aVTR button
Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to
start recording, then press once more to stop.
bRET (return video) button
You can use this as an assignable switch (see
page 145).
Use this to check the video when Lens RET is
assigned to this button (factory default setting). If
you press this during recording pause, the last few
seconds recorded appear on the viewfinder screen
(recording review) (see page 75).
Pressing this button (single click) during
recording or playback records a Shot Mark 1
mark, and double-clicking records a Shot Mark 2
mark (see page 77).
cEXPAND FOCUS button
When the viewfinder display setting is L, R, or
3D, the displayed image expands, making
focusing easier (Expand Focus function).
Press the button again to return to the previous
display.
dZoom lever
Press the W end for wide-angle and the T end for
telephoto.
Press the lever harder for a faster zoom action.
eIRIS switch
AUTO: The iris is adjusted automatically.
MANU (maual): Adjust the iris with the IRIS
dial.
fPUSH AUTO button
When the IRIS switch is in the MANU position,
press this button for an instantaneous auto
adjustment. The iris is automatically adjusted
while the button is held down.
gREMOTE FOCUS connector
Connects to an optional focus demand for focus
remote control operation.
hREMOTE ZOOM connector
Connects to an optional zoom demand for zoom
remote control operation.
iREMOTE CONVERGENCE
connector
Connects to an optional convergence demand for
convergence remote control operation.
Operating and Connectors Section
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 21
Chapter 1 Overview
Lens Block (right side)
aAUTO CONVERGENCE button
Press this button to set the convergence distance
to the current focus distance (see page 61).
bCONVERGENCE dial
Turn this dial to adjust the convergence distance.
Turn the dial clockwise to move the convergence
point closer, and counterclockwise to move the
convergence point further away (factory default
setting).
You can set the direction of rotation of the dial
using OPERATION >Dial Operation >Conv.
Clockwise in the setup menu.
You can change the function assigned to the dial
using OPERATION >Lens Dial >Inner in the
setup menu.
cFOCUS dial
Turn this dial to adjust the focus.
Turn the dial clockwise to focus on closer
subjects, and counterclockwise to focus on distant
subjects (factory default setting).
You can set the direction of rotation of the dial
using OPERATION >Dial Operation >Focus
Clockwise in the setup menu.
You can change the function assigned to the dial
using OPERATION >Lens Dial >Mid in the
setup menu.
dZOOM dial
Turn this dial to adjust the zoom.
Turn the dial clockwise to zoom out for wide-
angle shots, and counterclockwise to zoom in for
long-distance shots (factory default setting).
You can set the direction or rotation of the dial
using OPERATION >Dial Operation >Zoom
Clockwise in the setup menu.
You can change the function assigned to the dial
using OPERATION >Lens Dial >Outer in the
setup menu.
eASSIGN. (assignable) 6 switch
You can assign a function to this switch using
OPERATION >Assignable SW in the setup menu
(see page 142). The grid function is assigned to
this switch by factory default setting.
fVF DISPLAY SELECT switch
Switches the image displayed in the viewfinder.
L: Displays the left lens image, in color.
R: Displays the right lens image, in color.
L+R: Displays an overlay of the left lens image
and the right lens image, in color, by
calculating the average for each pixel.
L-R: Displays the image obtained by subtracting
the right lens image from the left lens image,
in color.
3D: Displays a 3D image, in color.
Anaglyph: Displays an anaglyph.
3D can be displayed in the supplied viewfinder
only.
Only the left or right image can be displayed in
DXF series viewfinders.
gSHIFT button
Use this button in combination with other buttons.
hIRIS dial
For manual iris adjustment, set the IRIS switch to
the MANU (manual) position, then turn this dial.
Turn the dial clockwise to open the iris aperture,
and counterclockwise to close the iris aperture
(factory default setting).
You can set the direction of rotation of the dial
using OPERATION >Dial Operation >Iris
Clockwise in the setup menu.
iND SELECT (ND filter) switch
Switches between four ND filters built into this
camcorder.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
22
Chapter 1 Overview
When this selector is used, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
You can change a MAINTENANCE menu
setting so that different white balance settings can
be stored for different FILTER selector positions.
This allows you to automatically obtain optimum
white balance for the current shooting conditions
in linkage with the filter selection.
For details, see “Adjusting the White Balance”
(page 54).
jFOCUS switch
AUTO: The auto focus function is constantly
active. Even with the switch in the AUTO
position, you can manually adjust the focus
by operating the FOCUS dial.
MANU (manual): The manual mode allows
focusing adjustment with the FOCUS dial.
In manual mode, auto focus adjustment is
also possible, by pressing the PUSH AF
button.
kPUSH AF (auto focus) button
When the focus adjustment is in the manual
mode, by pressing this button you can use the auto
focus for an instantaneous adjustment to the
subject.
When the button is pressed, the auto focus
operates until the image is in focus, then
disengages.
Even when the FOCUS switch is set to AUTO, by
pressing this button, you can restart the auto
focus.
Notes on auto focus
• In the following cases, it may be difficult to
focus on the subject. If this does happen, use
manual focusing.
- If the subject has no contrast
- If the subject is moving rapidly
- When shooting point light sources, under
street lighting or at night
- When there are very bright objects close to the
subject
- When shooting through a glass window
• If there are a number of objects within the
screen at close and far range, the focus may not
be on the intended subject. In this case, with the
subject on which you want to focus in the center
of the screen, press the PUSH AF button.
• After focusing with the PUSH AF button, if you
operate the zoom or adjust the iris, the depth of
field may become shallower, losing crisp focus.
In such cases, press the PUSH AF button once
more.
• If you focus at wide-angle then zoom to
telephoto, the subject may no longer be in focus.
• It may take time until the image is in focus
while using the slow shutter mode.
Note on zoom speed
Depending on the shooting distance, the zoom
speed may fall as the lens approaches the
telephoto end.
Front
aREC START (recording start) button
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop
recording. The effect is the same as that of the
REC button.
bSHUTTER selector
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter
mode setting. When this switch is operated, the
FILTER selector
setting
ND filter
1 CLEAR
21/4 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/4)
31/16 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/16)
41/64 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/64)
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 23
Chapter 1 Overview
new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for
about three seconds.
For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
(page 56).
cMENU knob
Changes the item selection or a setting within the
menu (see page 101).
dAUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/
black balance adjustment) switch
Activates the automatic white/black balance
adjustment functions.
WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch (see page 24) is
set to A or B, the white balance setting is
stored in the corresponding memory. If the
WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the
automatic white balance adjustment function
does not operate.
BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance
automatically.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even
when the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)
function is operating.
If you push the switch to the WHITE side once
more during the automatic white balance
adjustment, the adjustment is cancelled and the
white balance setting returns to the original
setting.
If you push the switch to the BLACK side once
more during the automatic black balance
adjustment, the adjustment is cancelled and the
black balance setting returns to the original
setting.
eMIC (microphone) LEVEL control
Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1, 2, 3
and 4 (see page 63).
Right side (near the front)
aASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these
switches on OPERATION >Assignable SW in
the setup menu (see page 142).
EZ Mode is assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 switch,
and Off is assigned to the ASSIGN. 2/3 switches
as the factory default setting.
The ASSIGN.1/3 switches are provided with an
indicator to show whether a function is assigned
to the switch (ON) or not (OFF).
bCOLOR TEMP. (color temperature)
button
Press to light the button and change the color
temperature for shooting (factory default setting).
You can use this as an assignable switch (see
page 142).
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
24
Chapter 1 Overview
cALARM (alarm tone volume
adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the warning tone that is
output via the built-in speaker or optional
earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if MAINTENANCE >Audio >Min
Alarm Volume in the setup menu is set to [Set],
the alarm tone is audible even when this volume
control is at the minimum position.
dMONITOR (monitor volume
adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than the
warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker
or earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
eMONITOR (audio monitor selection)
switches
By means of combinations of the two switches,
you can select audio that you want to hear through
the built-in speaker or earphones.
Position of down-side switch: CH-1/2
Position of down-side switch: CH-3/4
a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE
jack, you can hear the audio in stereo. (Under
MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu,
Headphone Out must be set to STEREO.)
fASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch
You can assign the desired function to this switch
on OPERATION >Assignable SW in the setup
menu (see page 143).
Off is assigned to this switch when the camcorder
is shipped from the factory.
This is a momentary type switch. Each press of
the switch turns the function assigned to this
switch on or off.
gGAIN selector
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match
the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be
selected on OPERATION >Gain Switch in the
setup menu (see page 115). (The factory settings
are L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB.)
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
hOUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic
contrast control) switch
Switches the video signal output from the camera
module, between the following two.
BARS: Output the color bar signal.
CAM: Output the video signal being shot. When
this is selected, you can switch DCC 1) on and
off.
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very
bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the
subject, objects in the background will be lost in the
glare. The DCC function will suppress the high
intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is
particularly effective in the following cases.
• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background
through a window
• Any high contrast scene
iWHITE BAL (white balance memory)
switch
Controls adjustment of the white balance.
PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the preset
value (the factory default setting: 3200K).
Use this setting when you have no time to
adjust the white balance.
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment
settings already stored in A or B. Push the
AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 23) on
the WHITE side, to automatically adjust the
white balance, and save the adjustment
settings in memory A or memory B.
Position of up-side
switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3 Channel 1 audio
MIX Channels 1 and 2 mixed
audio (stereo) a)
CH-2/CH-4 Channel 2 audio
Position of up-side
switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3 Channel 3 audio
MIX Channels 3 and 4 mixed
audio (stereo) a)
CH-2/CH-4 Channel 4 audio
ALARM
Minimum Maximum
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 25
Chapter 1 Overview
B (ATW 1)): When this switch is set to B and
OPERATION >White Setting >White
Switch<B> is set to [ATW] in the setup
menu, ATW is activated.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch
even when ATW is in use.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white
balance of the picture being shot is adjusted
automatically for varying lighting conditions.
jMENU ON/OFF switch
To use this switch, open the cover.
This switch is used to display the menu on the
viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Each
time the switch is pushed down, the menu screen
is turned on and off. The function of this switch is
the same as that of the MENU button in the
thumbnail screen operations section.
kSTATUS ON/SEL/OFF (menu display
on/page selection/display off) switch
MENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /
ESCAPE switch
When the menu is not displayed, this switch
functions as the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch.
When the menu is displayed, the switch functions
as the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch.
(To use the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch, open the cover.)
Use the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch in the
following way.
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed
upward, a window to confirm the menu
settings and status of the camcorder appears
on the viewfinder screen (see page 68). The
window consists of five pages, which are
switched each time the switch is pushed
upward. Each page is displayed for about 10
seconds.
OFF: To clear the page immediately after
display, push this switch down to the OFF
position.
Use the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE in the
following way.
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this
position after a setting is changed in the setup
menu displays the message to confirm
whether the previous settings are cancelled.
Pushing this switch up to this position again
cancels the previous settings.
Pushing this switch up to this position before
a setting is changed in the setup menu or after
a setting change is cancelled in the setup
menu displays the message to confirm
whether the setting is reset to the initial
value. Pushing this switch up to this position
again resets the settings to the initial value.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page,
which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.
Each time the switch is pushed to this
position, the page returns to one stage higher
in the hierarchy.
lCover
Open this cover to use the MENU ON/OFF
switch or the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
26
Chapter 1 Overview
Right side (near the rear)
aBuilt-in speaker
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E 1) sound
during recording, and playback sound during
playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to
reinforce visual warnings (see page 159). If you
connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack, the
speaker output is suppressed automatically.
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric”. In E-E
mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder
are output after passing through internal electric
circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.
bMonochrome LCD panel
Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining
media capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on
(see page 31).
cWARNING indicator
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs
(see page 159).
dACCESS lamp
Lights up in blue when data is written to or read
from the recording media.
eProtection cover of the audio control
section
Open to access the audio control section (see
page 27).
fProtection cover of the thumbnail
screen operations section
Open to access the thumbnail screen operations
section (see page 27).
gF REV (fast reverse) button and
indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse
direction. The playback speed changes in the
order ×4 t ×15 t ×24 with each press of the
button. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the reverse direction.
hPLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to view play back video images
using the viewfinder screen. The indicator lights
during playback.
Press this button again during playback to pause,
outputting a still image. At this time the indicator
flashes at a rate of once per second.
Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during
playback or pause starts high speed playback in
the forward or reverse direction.
iF FWD (fast forward) button and
indicator
This plays back at high speed in the forward
direction. The playback speed changes in the
order ×4 t ×15 t ×24 with each press of the
button. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the forward direction.
jPREV button
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
If you press this together with the F REV button,
the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded
clip on the recording media.
If you press this button twice in rapid succession,
the jump is to the first frame of the last preceding
clip (or the first frame of the current clip when no
preceding clips exist).
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 27
Chapter 1 Overview
kSTOP button
Press this button to stop playback.
lNEXT button
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
If you press this together with the F FWD button,
the jump is to the first frame of the last recorded
clip on the recording media.
mEXPAND (expand function) button
If you press this button when the thumbnail
screen is displayed, the duration of the selected
clip is divided into 12, and the first frame of each
of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail
display (expand thumbnail screen).
For details about the expand thumbnail screen, see
page 98.
nHOLD (display hold) button
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data
displayed in the monochrome LCD panel. (The
timecode generator continues running.) Pressing
this button again releases the hold.
For details of the counter display, see page 31.
oRESET/RETURN button
Resets the value shown in the time counter
display in the monochrome LCD panel.
According to the settings of the PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch (see page 28) and the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (see page 28), this
button resets the display as follows.
a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the
media, those bits which can be used to record useful
information for the user such as scene number,
shooting place, etc.
For details, see “Setting the Time Data” (page 65).
This button returns to the previous screen when
pressed during thumbnail screen display, expand
thumbnail screen display, or shot mark thumbnail
screen display.
pDISPLAY switch
This cycles the data displayed in the time counter
display in the monochrome LCD panel through
the sequence COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT (see
page 31).
COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/
playback time (hours, minutes, seconds,
frames).
TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bits data.
qBACKLIGHT button
Turns the backlight of the monochrome LCD on
and off. The backlight of the monochrome LCD
panel will be turned on when the camcorder is
powered on for the first time after shipped from
the factory.
Thumbnail screen operations section and audio
control section
aTHUMBNAIL indicator
This lights when thumbnail screen is displayed.
bTHUMBNAIL button
Press this button to display the thumbnail screen
(see page 89) and to carry out a thumbnail
operation.
Press once more to return to the original display.
Settings of switches To re set
DISPLAY switch:
COUNTER
Counter to 0:00:00:00
DISPLAY switch:
TC
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch: SET
Timecode to 00:00:00:00
DISPLAY switch:
U-BIT
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch: SET
User bits data a) to 00 00 00
00
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
28
Chapter 1 Overview
cSET (set) button and arrow buttons
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit
settings, and for thumbnail screen operations (see
page 94).
When the menu is displayed, press this button to
select an item or to confirm the setting change.
dMENU button
Each press of this button turns the setup menu
display on and off.
The function of this button is the same as that of
the MENU ON/OFF switch.
eF-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/
recording run) switch
Selects the operating mode of the internal
timecode generator. The operating mode is set as
explained below, depending on the position of the
switch.
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless
of whether the camcorder is recording. Use
this setting when synchronizing the timecode
with external timecode.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during
recording. Use this setting to have a
consecutive timecode on the recording
media.
For details, see “Setting the Timecode” (page 65)
and “Setting the User Bits” (page 66).
fLEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio
channel 1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs
Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels
1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/
CH2 and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches are
set to MANUAL.
gAUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio
channel 3/4 adjustment method
selection) switch
Select the audio level adjustment method for each
of audio channels 3 and 4.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
hESSENCE MARK button
By pressing this button when the thumbnail
display of a clip is on the screen, you can view the
following thumbnail display of the shot-marked
frames of that clip, depending on the item
selected in a list displayed on the screen.
All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked with
essence marks.
Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 1.
Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 2.
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3
to Shot Mark 9.
If you have recorded clips by using planning
metadata that defined names for Shot Mark 0 to
Shot Mark 9, the defined names are displayed
instead of the above item names in the list.
iSHIFT button
Use this in combination with other buttons.
jPRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/
CLOCK switch
Selects the type of timecode to record.
PRESET: Record new timecode on the media.
REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the
existing timecode recorded on the media.
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-
RUN mode.
CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the
internal clock. Regardless of the setting of
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the
camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.
kAUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio
channel 1/2 adjustment method
selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for each
of audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
lAUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio
channel 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the
microphone connected to the MIC IN
connector
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF
portable tuner if it is installed
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 29
Chapter 1 Overview
Left side and upper section
aASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these
switches on OPERATION >Assignable SW in
the setup menu (see page 143).
Off is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory.
bUSB connector
Used to put this camcorder into USB connection
mode and use it as an external storage device for
a computer. When a computer without
ExpressCard slot is connected to this connector,
every memory card inserted in left slots in the
camcorder is recognized as a drive for that
computer.
cExternal device connector
Connect an optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adapter.
Connecting a CBK-WA01 allows Wi-Fi
connection (wireless LAN connection) between
the camcorder and a computer.
Note
Use this connector only for connecting a CBK-WA01.
Do not connect and use a USB hub or similar products.
For details on how to use the CBK-WA01, refer to the
Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled
“Manuals for Solid-State Memory 3D Camcorder”).
dSxS memory card slots
These four slots can receive SxS memory cards or
other recording media. The left slots (A and B)
record the left lens image and the right slots (A
and B) record the right lens image. When slot A
is being used on the left, slot A is also used on the
right. It is not possible to use slot A on the left and
slot B on the right, or vice versa (see page 71).
eACCESS lamps
Indicate the state of each slot (see page 71).
fEJECT buttons
To remove the recording media from the slot,
press the EJECT button to release the lock, then
press the button once more. This makes the media
come out of the slot partially (see page 72).
gSlot cover
Slide to the left and right to open and close.
hSLOT SELECT (SxS memory card
select) button
Press this button to select the slots to use (A or B).
The same slots are selected (A or B) for use on
both the left and right (see page 72).
iHDMI output connector
Outputs HDMI signals for video monitoring.
When a video monitor provided with an HDMI
signal input connector is connected to this
HDMIGENLOCK
IN
TC IN
VIDEO
OUTTC
OUT
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
30
Chapter 1 Overview
connector, you can monitor picture being shot
(camera picture) or playback picture.
jGENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)
connector (BNC type)
This connector inputs a reference signal when the
camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode is
to be synchronized with external equipment.
Available reference signals vary depending on the
current system frequency as shown in the
following table.
(Genlock for the camera module supports
horizontal sync signals only.) Use
MAINTENANCE >GENLOCK in the setup
menu to adjust the genlock H-phase (phase of
horizontal sync signal).
kTC IN (timecode input) connector
(BNC type)
To apply an external lock to the timecode of the
camcorder, input the reference timecode.
For details, see “Setting the Timecode” (page 65).
lVIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)
Outputs video signals for monitoring. The output
signals can be selected either composite video or
HD-Y depending on the setting of OPERATION
>Output >Signal Format in the setup menu.
mTC OUT (timecode output) connector
(BNC type)
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the
timecode of this camcorder, connect this
connector to the external VTR’s timecode input
connector.
Rear
aTALLY (back tally) indicators (red)
Light up during recording. They will not light if
the TALLY switch is set to OFF. These indicators
also flash to indicate warnings (see page 26). The
tally indicator on the front of the viewfinder and
the REC indication on the viewfinder screen light
or flash in the same manner.
For details, see “Operation Warnings” (page 159).
bTALLY switch
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator
function.
cEARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording
and left-slot playback sound during playback.
System frequency Available reference signals
1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/29.97P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/23.98P (PsF
output)
1080/23.98PsF, 480/59.94i
1080/23.98P
(Pulldown output)
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
1080/23.98P
(Pure P output)
1080/23.98P
720/59.94P 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,
480/59.94i
720/29.97P 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,
480/59.94i
720/23.98P 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94P,
480/59.94i
1080/50i 1080/50i, 576/50i
1080/25P 1080/50i, 576/50i
720/50P 1080/50i, 720/50P, 576/50i
720/25P 1080/50i, 720/50P, 576/50i
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 31
Chapter 1 Overview
When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the
alarm sound through the earphone. Plugging an
earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the
built-in speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo on
MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu.
dAUDIO IN selectors
Select the audio source you connect to the
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors.
LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or
other external audio signal source
MIC: When connecting a microphone that does
not require 48 V power supply
+48V: When connecting a microphone that
requires 48 V power supply
eHD/SD SDI OUT connector (BNC type)
Outputs 2-system Left/Right HDSDI signals
(with embedded audio). The output from this
connector can be turned on or off by
OPERATION >Output >SDI Output in the setup
menu.
fAUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel
1 and channel 2 input) connectors (XLR
type, 3-pin, female)
These are audio input connectors for channels 1
and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment
or a microphone.
gBottom cover
This is provided for protecting the cables
connected to the connectors on the rear panel.
By loosening the screws which retain the cover to
the bottom of the camcorder, you can adjust the
position of the cover depending on the size and
shape of the microphone or audio cable plugs.
After adjusting the position, tighten the screws to
secure the cover.
hAUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-
pin, male)
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The
audio signals are selected by the MONITOR
switch.
iREMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect a remote control unit, which makes it
possible to control the camcorder remotely.
Note
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control
Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the
camcorder POWER switch.
aTimecode status
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is
selected.
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode
generator is locked to an external signal input
to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.
bCounter display mode
Shows the type of information selected by the
DISPLAY switch to be displayed in the time
counter display.
COUNTER: Counter values
TC: Timecode
U-BIT: User bits data
cTime counter display
Switches displays of time counter values,
timecode, and user bits data, depending on the
position of the DISPLAY switch.
When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the
timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the
format shown below. When the HOLD button is
pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is
displayed in the normal format.
dHOLD indication
Appears when the timecode generator output is
displayed in the hold mode.
Monochrome LCD Panel
The three dots indicates that timecode is
displayed in the hold mode.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
32
Chapter 1 Overview
eAudio level indicators
Indicate the audio recording or playback levels of
channels 1 to 4.
fLock icon
Appears when the recording media is write-
protected.
gRemaining media capacity indicator
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining
capacity of recording media in the slots.
hRemaining battery capacity indicator
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining
battery capacity.
aPlug
Connect to the VF connector (26-pin) on the
camcorder.
bStopper
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the
camcorder when it is slid from side to side.
cEyecup
dDiopter adjustment ring
Allows for optimal focus adjustment.
eEyepiece
You can raise this up when required by the
situation.
fViewfinder barrel
You can raise this up or rotate when required by
the situation.
gTally indicator
Lights up when recording is started by a press of
the REC START button, the VTR button, or the
VTR button on the remote control unit.
When an abnormality occurs, the tally indicator
flashes to indicate a warning.
hPEAKING control
Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture
sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This
control has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
iCONTRAST control
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
jBRIGHT control
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
kTALLY switch
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of
the viewfinder.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to
high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.
lZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Controls the zebra pattern display on the
viewfinder screen as follows.
ON: Display a zebra pattern.
OFF: Do not display a zebra pattern.
Viewfinder
Viewfinder Screen Display 33
Chapter 1 Overview
mDISPLAY switch
Turns the display of text information on and off.
ON: Display text information.
OFF: Do not display text information.
nMIRROR switch
The image display on the monitor screen becomes
reversed horizontally or vertically when the
viewfinder barrel is raised up or rotated. Use this
switch to control the image display in such
situation.
L/R: Reverse the image horizontally.
OFF: Do not reverse the image.
B/T: Reverse the image vertically.
oViewfinder cable
pMicrophone holder
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video
picture but also characters and messages
indicating the camcorder settings and operating
status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc.
When the menu screen is not displayed and the
DISPLAY switch is set to ON, the items for
which an ON setting was made with
OPERATION >Super Impose in the setup menu
or with related switches are displayed at the top
and bottom of the screen.
Caution messages are indicated for three seconds
when you carry out operations to change
camcorder settings. Adjustment execution
messages are indicated while adjustments
proceed. When adjustments are finished,
messages showing the results of adjustments
appear for three seconds.
Not only these indications are displayed on the
viewfinder screen, but a menu setting enables
them to be output as video signals.
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder
screen are shown below.
Note
The distance displayed on the screen should only be used
as a guide.
Top of viewfinder screen
a3D/2D
Indicates the 3D/2D setting. During playback,
“PLAY” is displayed after “3D” or “2D”.
Viewfinder Screen
Display
q
s
Viewfinder Screen Display
34
Chapter 1 Overview
bZoom position
Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in
the range from 0 to 99.
cFocus position
Indicates the focus position as distance from the
lens surface to the subject (in units of m).
dGreen tally
Lights when the camcorder is the following
states.
• MAINTENANCE >Camera Config >HD-SDI
Remote I/F is set to [G-Tally] in the setup menu
and a recording control signal is output from the
HD/SD SDI OUT connector.
eMedia status
Displays the name of the currently active media
slot (A or B).
fRecording mode/operation status
Indicates the current recording mode/operation
status as follows.
The z indicator flashes when OPERATION
>Format>3D/2D in the setup menu is set to 3D
and you are recording to either the left slots or
right slots only.
gWireless receiver reception level
When a wireless receiver is installed in the
camcorder, “W” appears together with four
segment reception level indicators for each of the
channels (1 to 4) that can be used by the receiver.
The indications are as follows.
In normal situation: The number of white
segments indicates the strength of the signal
level.
Muting (for an analog receiver) or error rate
aggravation (for a digital receiver): The
number of gray segments indicates the
strength of the signal level.
Reception level over peak: “P” is displayed
instead of the indicators. 1)
Tuner battery is low: The channel number and
indicator of the corresponding channel
flash. 1)
1) When an optional DWR-S01D is used
hBattery remaining/voltage capacity
The following is displayed depending on the type
of power source.
iExternal power input
Appears when power is supplied from an external
power source connected to the DC IN connector.
jColor temperature
Displays a color temperature calculated from the
gain of R and B, in the range 1.5 K to 50.0 K (in
steps of 0.1 K). The +/– signs may be displayed
depending on the Offset White setting (see
page 119).
No display: Offset White is OFF
+: The value of Offset White is greater than
3200K.
–: The value of Offset White is less than 3200K.
kNumber of system lines
Indicates the number of system lines (1080/720/
576/480) of video currently being recorded or
played back.
Indication Meaning
zREC Recording in progress
STBY Standby for recording
zCACHE Standby in Picture Cache mode
zINT REC Recording in progress in Interval
Recording mode
zINT STBY Standby for next recording in
Interval Recording mode
INT STBY Standby in Interval Recording
mode
zFRM REC Recording in progress in Frame
Recording mode
zFRM
STBY
Standby for next recording in
Frame Recording mode
FRM STBY Standby in Frame Recording mode
zS&Q REC Recording in progress in Slow &
Quick Motion mode
S&Q STBY Standby in Slow & Quick Motion
mode
zCALL Being called from a connected
device
BREVIEW During recording review
Type of power
source
What is displayed
InfoLithium
battery
Remaining battery capacity icon
and remaining recording time
Anton Bauer
battery
Remaining battery capacity (%
indication)
Other type than
above
Input voltage
Viewfinder Screen Display 35
Chapter 1 Overview
lVideo format
Indicates the format of video being currently
played back or recorded (see page 51).
mDepth of field indication
Error/warning indication
A bar indicates the depth of field. The display unit
is meters or feet, as selected by OPERATION
>Display On/Off >Lens Info in the setup menu.
An error or warning message is displayed here
depending on the situation.
Under this area, you can also display the name of
the next clip to be recorded (see page 121).
nSpecial recording mode indication
The following is displayed when the camcorder is
in a special recording mode.
• Frame Rec (Frame Recording mode)
• Interval Rec (Interval Recording mode)
• S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick Motion mode)
oSpecial recording mode settings
indication
Appears when the camcorder is in a special
recording mode.
Bottom of viewfinder screen
aTLCS iris control mode
The following icons are displayed to indicate the
video level control modes based on the Total
Level Control System (TLCS).
bFocus adjustment mode
Indicates the current focus adjustment mode of
the camcorder.
• AF (Auto Focus mode)
• MF (Manual Focus mode)
• MF* (Manual Focus mode when the MF Assist
function is on)
cExternal device control
“REC2” is displayed when MAINTENANCE
>Camera Config >HD-SDI Remote I/F is set to
[Chara] in the setup menu and a recording control
signal is output from the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector.
dVideo level indication
An indication is displayed together with an
appropriate ND filter position number when the
light level of the subject is too high or too low.
eTimecode
Caution message
Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time,
timecode, user bits data or other information
selected by the DISPLAY switch (see page 27).
Also indicates a caution message when caution is
required such as when you try to change settings.
fBrightness level
Indicates the average brightness level (%) of the
detection area.
gSubject distance range (3D) or
recording status (2D)
In 3D record mode, displays the distance range to
the subject that produces natural stereoscopic
images.
In 2D record mode or in 3D mode when recording
to either left slots or right slots only, displays the
recording status.
Single Rec L: Recording in 3D mode to left slots
only
Single Rec R: Recording in 3D mode to right
slots only
Icon TLCS control mode
Backlight mode
Standard mode
Spotlight mode
STD
STD
Viewfinder Screen Display
36
Chapter 1 Overview
2D Rec L: Recording in 2D mode to left slots
only
2D Rec R: Recording in 2D mode to right slots
only
2D Rec L&R: Recording in 2D mode to both left
and right slots
2D L: Can record in 2D mode to left slots only
2D R: Can record in 2D mode to right slots only
2D L&R: Can record in 2D mode to both left and
right slots
2D--: Cannot record
hConvergence distance
Displays the distance from the lens surface to the
convergence point in units of meters (m).
iElectric color temperature filter
Appears when the CC 5600K function is set to on.
jFilter position
Indicates the currently selected ND filter position
number. (see page 21).
When ELECTRICAL CC is assigned to an
assignable switch, the electrical filter position (A/
B/C/D) appears to the right of the ND filter
position (1 to 4), as shown on the previous page.
kWhite balance memory
Indicates the currently selected white balance
automatic adjustment memory.
ATW: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode
W:A: Memory A mode
W:B: Memory B mode
W:P: Preset mode
3200: When the assignable switch to which Color
Temp SW 3200K has been assigned is on
4300: When the assignable switch to which Color
Temp SW 4300K has been assigned is on
5600: When the assignable switch to which Color
Temp SW 5600K has been assigned is on
6300: When the assignable switch to which Color
Temp SW 6300K has been assigned is on
lGain value
Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video
amplifier, as set by the GAIN selector.
mShutter
Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.
For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
(page 56).
nAudio level meters
Indicate the audio levels of channel 1 and channel
2.
oRemaining media capacity
Indicates the recording time remaining for each of
the media loaded in the slots (A or B). The
available time for recording with the current
video format (recording bit rate) is calculated
according to the remaining space of each media
and indicated in time units of minutes. A lock
icon appears if the media is write-protected.
When media is inserted in both the left and right
slots, and the camcorder is recording or can
record to both, this indicates the media (left or
right) with the lower remaining recording time.
When the camcorder is recording or can record to
left slots or right slots only, this indicates the
remaining recording time for that media.
pHistogram
Shows a pixel distribution of video luminance.
qIris position
Indicates the iris position and the setting for iris
override (reference value for the lens iris) (see
page 58).
The iris override setting is indicated by four
segments indicator as follows.
Reference
value
Indicator
+0.25
x
Lower left segment is lit in grey.
+0.5 x
x
Left two segments are lit in grey.
+0.75 x
xx
Left two segments and lower
right segment are lit in grey.
+1 xx
xx
All segments are lit in grey.
–0.25
s
Lower left segment is lit in
white.
–0.5 s
s
Left two segments are lit in
white.
–0.75 s
ss
Left two segments and lower
right segment are lit in white.
–1 ss
ss
All segments are lit in white.
Preparing a Power Supply 37
Chapter 2 Preparations
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and
AC adaptors listed below.
• BP-GL95A/L60S/L80S Lithium-ion Battery
Pack
• AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC
Adaptor
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey the law
in the relative area or country.
When a BP-GL95A/L60S/L80S Battery Pack is
used, the camcorder will operate continuously for
the time shown below.
WARNING
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
Note
The battery pack operating time depends on the
frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient
temperature when used.
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger
suitable for each battery.
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.
Note on using the battery pack
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully
recharged.
To attach the battery pack
1Press the battery pack against the back
of the camcorder, aligning the line on
the side of the battery pack with the
matching line on the camcorder.
2Slide the battery pack down until its
“LOCK” arrow points at the matching
line on the camcorder.
Chapter2Preparations
Preparing a Power
Supply
Using a Battery Pack
Model name Operating time
BP-GL95A Approx. 310 minutes
BP-L60S Approx. 210 minutes
BP-L80S Approx. 270 minutes
1BP-GL95A/L60S/L80S
2Align these lines.
1“LOCK” arrow
2Matching line on the camcorder
Attaching the Viewfinder
38
Chapter 2 Preparations
Note
If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminal
may be damaged.
To detach the battery pack
Holding the release button in, pull the battery
pack up.
Notes
• During recording and playback (while the ACCESS
lamp on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the
ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in orange),
be careful never to remove the battery pack.
• Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing
the battery pack.
Mount an AC-DN2B/DN10 on the camcorder in
the same way as a battery pack, then connect to
the AC power supply.
The AC-DN2B/DN10 can supply up to 100 W of
power.
CAUTION
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the
camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun.
Direct sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be
focused in the viewfinder and cause fire.
Note
When attaching the viewfinder, make notes of the
following points.
• Be sure to power off the camcorder before coupling the
viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF connector
(26-pin). If you make this connection when the
camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not
function properly.
• Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the
camcorder’s VF connector (26-pin). If the coupling is
loose, noise may appear on the video or the tally
indicator may not operate properly.
11 Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring, 2 attach the
viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting
shoe, and 3 tighten the viewfinder left-
to-right positioning ring.
Using AC Power
Release button
To an AC outlet
Attaching the Viewfinder
Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder
Stopper
Attaching the Viewfinder 39
Chapter 2 Preparations
2Couple the viewfinder connector to the
VF connector (26-pin).
Detaching the viewfinder
You can detach the viewfinder by following the
attaching procedure in reverse order, but there is
an additional action to take: when detaching the
viewfinder from the fitting shoe, pull up the
stopper.
To adjust the viewfinder left-to-right position,
loosen the left-to-right positioning ring, and to
adjust the front-to-back position, loosen the front-
to-back positioning knob.
You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder.
To reverse the display (image/text indication)
vertically
The viewfinder can be rotated as much as 180
degrees toward the direction facing the subject.
When you do this, the picture and other
information displayed in the viewfinder appear
upside down. To restore the normal display, set
the MIRROR switch on the rear panel of the
viewfinder to B/T.
You can view the LCD screen inside the
viewfinder or its mirrored image by lifting up the
viewfinder barrel or the eyepiece.
To display 3D images in the viewfinder, lift up
the eyepiece to view the image.
This section describes how to lift up the
viewfinder barrel and detach it. The eyepiece can
also be lifted up and detached in the same way.
Adjusting the Viewfinder Position
VF connector (26-pin)
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Adjusting the Viewfinder Angle
Lifting Up the Viewfinder Barrel
and Eyepiece
LCD screen
Attaching the Viewfinder
40
Chapter 2 Preparations
To raise up the viewfinder barrel
Push the clip on the bottom to release (1) and
flip up the viewfinder barrel (2).
It locks at the 120-degree position.
Normally use it in the locked position.
Although you can open it farther from the lock
position, once return it to the closed position to
lock it at the 120-degree position again.
To detach the viewfinder barrel
1Push the clip on the bottom to release.
2Flip up the viewfinder barrel.
3Slide the knob on the top to the opposite
side of the viewfinder barrel.
4Detach the viewfinder barrel by
horizontally sliding it.
To reverse the display (image/text indication)
horizontally
By setting the MIRROR switch on the rear panel
of the viewfinder to L/R, you can reverse the
picture and other information displayed in the
viewfinder horizontally.
Attaching the Viewfinder 41
Chapter 2 Preparations
To attach the hood
You can detach the viewfinder barrel or eyepiece
and attach a hood to make the image on the LCD
screen easier to see.
1Slide the button on top of the viewfinder
to release the lock.
2Align the protrusion on the top of the
hood with the groove on the viewfinder,
and then slide it horizontally.
3Lower the hood and lock using the
bottom clip.
4Open the hood and fasten in position.
To adjust the viewfinder focus
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the
viewfinder image is sharpest.
To adjust the viewfinder screen
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.
By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder
out of the way so that your right leg does not hit
the viewfinder while you are carrying the
camcorder.
Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus
and Screen
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
Diopter adjustment ring
1PEAKING control
2CONTRAST control
3BRIGHT control
Attaching the Viewfinder
42
Chapter 2 Preparations
1Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder
positioning levers and the front-to-back
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then
pull the viewfinder slide assembly
forward.
2Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal
wrench, detach the viewfinder slide
assembly.
3Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied
bolts.
4Adjust the front-to-back position so
that the arm of the BKW-401 does not
touch the handle when it is raised.
You attach the optional CBK-VF01 viewfinder in
the same way as the supplied viewfinder.
For details, see page 38.
Note
The CBK-VF01 cannot display images in 3D.
Bolts with
hexagonal
hole
Viewfinder slide assembly
Bolts supplied with the BKW-401
Attaching a CBK-VF01 Viewfinder
Adjust position so that arm
does not touch handle
Attaching the Viewfinder 43
Chapter 2 Preparations
You can attach an optional DXF-series (5-inch) Electronic Viewfinder. To attach it, an Accessory Shoe
Kit (service part number: A-8274-968-B) is required.
For details, consult a Sony service representative.
Notes
• The 5-inch viewfinder does not support 3D display or anaglyh display.
• It is not possible to use either the supplied viewfinder or CBK-VF01 viewfinder with the 5-inch viewfinder at the same
time.
Remove the cover of the grip, and attach the shoe and stopper screw of the Accessory Shoe Kit.
Attaching a 5-inch Electronic Viewfinder
VF cable
Fixing ring
Guide plate
Shoe a)
Stopper screw a)
a) Supplied with the Accessory Shoe Kit
Setting the Area of Use
44
Chapter 2 Preparations
When using the camcorder for the first
time
The area of use is not factory preset. Before using
the camcorder, you need to set this item. (You
cannot use the camcorder without setting this
item.)
To set the area of use
1Set the POWER switch to the ON
position.
The screen for setting the area of use appears
in the viewfinder.
2Press the MENU knob.
The settings for selectable areas of use are
displayed.
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired area of use.
a) The composite signal output from this camcorder
is an NTSC signal with a black setup (7.5 IRE).
The system frequency is 59.94i.
b) The composite signal output from this camcorder
is an NTSC signal with no black setup. The
system frequency is 59.94i.
c) The composite signal output from this camcorder
is a PAL signal. The system frequency is 50i.
4Set the following items.
•Time Zone
• Date/Time
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations”
(page 101).
5Turn the MENU knob to select
“Finish”, then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder is now ready for use.
Setting the Area of Use
MENU knob
POWER switch
Setting Area of use
NTSC Area NTSC area (for areas other
than Japan) a)
NTSC(J) Area NTSC area (Japan) b)
PAL Ar ea PAL area c)
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock / Preparing the Audio Input System 45
Chapter 2 Preparations
You can set or change the date and time of the
internal clock. The date and time set are reflected
in the timecode.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 101).
1Select MAINTENANCE >Clock Set
>Date/Time in the setup menu.
2Press the MENU knob.
The Date/Time setting window appears.
3Turn the MENU knob to display the
desired value, and press the knob.
The selection shifts to the next item on the
right.
4To continue the remaining settings,
repeat step 3.
5Making sure that “SET” is selected,
press the MENU knob.
The internal clock is set with the date and
time set in steps 3 and 4.
To cancel the setting
Before executing step 5, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the
CANCEL/PRST side.
Attach the supplied microphone to the
microphone holder of the supplied viewfinder.
1Loosen the screw (1) and open the
microphone holder clamp (2).
2Place the microphone in the
microphone holder.
1Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
2Close the microphone holder.
3Tighten the screw.
3Plug the microphone cable into the MIC
IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 switch for the
Setting the Date/Time of
the Internal Clock
Preparing the Audio
Input System
Connecting a Microphone to the
MIC IN Connector
Microphone holder clamp
Preparing the Audio Input System
46
Chapter 2 Preparations
channel on which you want to record
the audio from this microphone to
FRONT.
4Secure the microphone cable with the
cable clamp.
You can connect up to two monaural
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2
connectors, using an optional CAC-12
Microphone Holder.
The following is the procedure for attaching an
electret condenser microphone such as the ECM-
674/678.
On how to attach the CAC-12, refer to the operation
manual for the CAC-12.
1Attach the electret condenser
microphone.
1Loosen the ball joint lock lever.
2Wind the microphone spacer (sheet
type, supplied with the microphone)
around the microphone, while peeling
off the protective sheets on both sides
of the microphone spacer.
3Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
4Close the microphone holder.
5Tighten the screw.
6Position so that the microphone does
not interfere with the viewfinder and
tighten the ball joint lock lever.
2Connect the microphone cable to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.
3Set the switches as follows.
• Set the AUDIO IN selectors indicated
below, depending on the power supply type
of the microphone.
Internal power supply: MIC
External power supply: +48V
• Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switch for
the channel to which the microphone is
connected to REAR.
Connecting Microphones to the
AUDIO IN Connectors
Microphone
Preparing the Audio Input System 47
Chapter 2 Preparations
4Switch the input level to match the
sensitivity of the microphone used.
Switch the input level by changing the setting of
MAINTENANCE >Audio >Rear MIC CH1/
CH2 Ref in the setup menu (factory default
setting is –60 dB). For details, see page 129.
Notes
• If the input level on the camcorder is not at an
appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud
sounds may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio
may be affected.
• In order for the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors
on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V
power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are
fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector,
use an adaptor.
• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once
you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to
lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12 (in step 1).
After detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two
screws back into their original places.
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system,
power the camcorder off and then fit one of the
following UHF portable tuners.
• DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
• WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
• WRR-860C/861/862 UHF Synthesized
Diversity Tuner
For details of these units, refer to the operation
manuals for them.
Note
The optional WRR Mount Bracket (service part number:
A-8278-057-B) is required to fit the WRR-862.
For details, contact your vendor or a Sony service
representative
To fit the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
1Remove the four fixing screws holding
the cover of the portable tuner/receiver
housing slot located in the rear of the
camcorder, to remove the cover.
2Insert the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
into the housing slot, and fasten the four
fixing screws.
3Set the AUDIO IN selector for the
channel to which you want to input
audio signal to WIRELESS (see
page 28).
Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner
(for a UHF Wireless Microphone
System)
1AUDIO IN selectors
2Monaural microphone
3AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switches
4To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector
DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
Tripod Mounting
48
Chapter 2 Preparations
1Attach the optional VCT-14/U14
Tripod Adaptor to the tripod.
2Mount the camcorder on the tripod
adaptor.
To remove the camcorder from the tripod
adaptor
Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the
direction of the arrow.
Note
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged
position even after the camcorder is removed. If this
happens, press the red button and move the lever as
shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position.
If the pin remains in the engaged position, you will not
be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Tripod Mounting
Tripod adaptor
Camera mount
Slide the camcorder forward along the
groove in the adaptor until it clicks.
Red button
Lever
Connecting a Video Light / Using the Shoulder Strap 49
Chapter 2 Preparations
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton
Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light
(powered by 12 V with maximum power
consumption of 50 W).
• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT
connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT
switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and
off automatically as you start and stop recording
on this camcorder.
• The output of the LIGHT connector on the
camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the
camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).
The brightness or color temperature of the light
will not change according to voltage increase.
Notes
• Do not use a video light with power consumption of
over 50 W.
• The brightness or color temperature of the light will
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN
connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V.
To attach the video light
Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on
the camcorder grip, and connect the video light
cable to the LIGHT connector.
Note
The accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder is of the
1/4-inch tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with
a slide-type shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit.
For information about using the cold shoe kit, refer to the
Supplement provided on the “Manuals for Solid-State
Memory 3D Camcorder” CD-ROM.
To attach the shoulder strap
1Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap
fitting.
2Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap
fitting on the other side of the grip in the
same way as in step 1.
Connecting a Video
Light
Using the Shoulder
Strap
Clip
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position
50
Chapter 2 Preparations
To remove the shoulder strap
You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth
within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps you
get the best balance for shooting with the
camcorder on your shoulder.
1Raise the lever in the center of the
shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder
pad.
2Slide the shoulder pad backward or
forward until it is in the most
convenient position.
3Bring down the lever to lock the
shoulder pad in the selected position.
Press here and pull in the direction
shown by the arrow to release.
Adjusting the Shoulder
Pad Position
Shoulder pad
Setting the Video Format 51
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 101).
The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and system
frequency.
a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P/23.98P: When OPERATION >Format >Country in the setup menu is set to [NTSC Area] or
[NTSC(J) Area]
50i/25P/50P: When OPERATION >Format >Country in the setup menu is set to [PAL Area]
Chapter3Adjustments and Settings
Setting the Video Format
OPERATION >Format menu settings Video format (recording
format/system frequency)
Frame size
HD System Line Rec Format System Frequency a)
1080 HQ 1920 59.94i HQ 1920/59.94i 1920×1080
50i HQ 1920/50i
29.97P HQ 1920/29.97P
25P HQ 1920/25P
23.98P HQ 1920/23.98P
HQ 1440 59.94i HQ 1440/59.94i 1440×1080
50i HQ 1440/50i
29.97P HQ 1440/29.97P
25P HQ 1440/25P
23.98P HQ 1440/23.98P
SP 1440 59.94i SP 1440/59.94i
50i SP 1440/50i
720 HQ 1280 59.94P HQ 1280/59.94P 720×1280
50P HQ 1280/50P
29.97P HQ 1280/29.97P
25P HQ 1280/25P
23.98P HQ 1280/23.98P
Selecting 3D or 2D Mode
52
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
Refer to the above table and change the settings of
the relevant items.
1Select OPERATION >Format in the
setup menu (see page 104).
2Turn the MENU knob to select the item
to change, and press the knob.
3Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the knob.
A confirmation message appears.
4Select [Execute] to execute, or select
[Cancel] to cancel, and then press the
MENU knob.
5When the setting of Country was
changed, power the camcorder off and
on again.
This selects 2D or 3D image recording mode.
Select OPERATION >Format >3D/2D in the
setup menu, and then select 3D or 2D.
When 3D is selected, the images from the left and
right lenses are recorded onto memory cards in
the left and right slots, respectively.
If one of the memory cards in the slots becomes
full during 3D recording, the camcorder either
stops recording or continues to record to a single
recordable slot only, according to the setting
using OPERATION >Format >3D Single Rec in
the setup menu.
When 2D is selected, images are recorded to slots
with memory cards inserted. If memory cards are
inserted in both the left and right slots, the left and
right images are recorded to memory cards in the
respective slots. If memory cards are inserted in
either the left or right slots only, images are
recorded to those memory cards only.
Changing the Video Format Selecting 3D or 2D
Mode
Selecting 3D or 2D
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 53
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
To ensure excellent image quality when using this
camcorder, conditions may require that both the
black balance and the white balance be adjusted.
Black balance and white balance adjustment
values that are automatically set by the camcorder
and the various settings are stored in the
camcorder memory and retained even when the
power is turned off.
Black balance adjustment
The black balance will require adjustment in the
following cases.
• When the camcorder is used for the first time
• When the camcorder has not been used for a
long time
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in
which the surrounding temperature has changed
greatly
• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo) values
have been changed by using OPERATION
>Gain Switch in the setup menu.
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black
balance when using the camcorder after it has
been off.
White balance adjustment
Always readjust the white balance when the
lighting conditions change.
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are
performed in the following order: black set and
black balance. Manual black balance adjustment
can be selected from the setup menu.
Note
Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled in the
following case.
• During recording
• In a special recording modes (Picture Cache Rec,
Interval Rec, Frame Rec, Slow & Quick)
• When the shutter mode is SLS
1Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
2Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLACK and release the switch.
The message “Executing...” appears during
execution, and changes to “Done” when the
adjustment finishes. Adjustment values are
saved to memory automatically.
Notes
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is
automatically closed.
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain
selection circuit is automatically activated so you may
see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not
a fault.
If automatic black balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the black balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Possible messages are listed below.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the black balance adjustment.
If the error message occurs again, an internal
check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
Adjusting the Black
Balance and the White
Balance
Adjusting the Black Balance
Error message Meaning
NG: Iris Not
Closed
The lens iris did not close;
adjustment was impossible.
NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be
completed within the standard
number of attempts.
NG: Out of
Range
The difference between the
reference value and the current
value is so great that it exceeds
the range. Adjustment was
impossible.
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
54
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
1Set the switches and selectors as shown
below.
• GAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that is
as small as possible)
• OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
• WHITE BAL switch: A or B 1)
1) Adjustment values are saved to memory B only
when OPERATION >White Setting >White
Switch<B> in the setup menu, is set to
[Memory].
2Set the FILTER selector to suit the
lighting conditions as follows.
3Place a white test card under the same
lighting conditions as for the subject to
be shot and zoom up to it.
Alternatively, any white object such as a
cloth or a wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as
follows.
Note
Make sure there are not bright spots in the
rectangle.
4Set the IRIS switch to AUTO.
5Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
WHITE and then release the switch.
The message “Executing...” appears during
execution, and changes to “OK: (color
temperature of subject)” when the
adjustment finishes.
The adjustment values are saved
automatically in the memory selected in
step 1 (A or B).
If the automatic white balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Possible messages are listed below.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the white balance adjustment. If the error
message occurs again, an internal check is
necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white
balance
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
This makes it possible to automatically set the
white balance to 5600K (factory default value) by
pressing the COLOR TEMP. button.
The color temperature to which the white balance
is set when the COLOR TEMP. button is pressed
can be selected from among 3200K, 4300K,
5600K, and 6300K on OPERATION
>Assignable SW in the setup menu. You can also
assign color temperatures to the ASSIGN. 1/3
switches or ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches.
To change the color temperature when
the ND filter is switched
You can assign electrical CC (color correction)
filters to ND filters (see page 21). This allows you
to change the color temperature automatically
when the ND filter is switched.
1Set MAINTENANCE >White Filter
>ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu
(see page 135) to On.
2To assign an electrical CC filter to
FILTER selector position number 1,
Adjusting the White Balance
Rectangle centered on the screen. The
lengths of the sides are 70% of the length
and width of the screen.
Error message Meaning
NG: Low Light The white video level is too low.
Either open the lens iris or
increase the gain.
NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be
completed within the standard
number of attempts.
NG: High Light The white video level is too
high. Either stop down the lens
iris or change the ND filter.
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 55
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
select [ND FLT C.Temp<1>]. To assign
it to positions 2 to 4, select [ND FLT
C.Temp<2-4>].
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired color temperature.
As you turn the MENU knob, the color
temperature changes as follows: 3200K y
4300K y 5600K y 6300K.
4Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.
To switch between electrical CC filters
with an assignable switch
You can assign the function that switches
between electrical CC filters to an assignable
switch. This allows you to switch between color
temperatures (3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that
have been assigned to up to four positions (A to
D) with each press of the assignable switch.
Regardless of assignments to assignable
switches, you can also switch between the color
temperatures assigned to each position from a
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit.
1Select MAINTENANCE >White Filter
in the setup menu (see page 135).
2Select the position to which to assign a
CC filter by selecting one of [Electrical
CC<A>] to [Electrical CC <D>], and
then turn the MENU knob to select the
desired color temperature.
As you turn the MENU knob, the color
temperature changes as follows: 3200K y
4300K y 5600K y 6300K.
To set no color temperature
Select “-----” with Electrical CC<C> or <D>
selected.
When the assignable switch is pressed, the
setting for that position is not displayed. For
example, if “-----” is set for one position, then
switching between the remaining three
positions is carried out.
3Repeat step 2 as required.
4Assign the electrical CC filter switching
function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an
assignable switch (see page 144).
White balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the white
balance is next adjusted even when the camcorder
power is turned off.
The camcorder has two white balance memories,
A and B. You can automatically save adjustment
values for each ND filter in the memory that
corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting
(A or B). The camcorder has four built-in ND
filters, allowing you to save a total of eight
adjustment values (4 × 2). However, the contents
of the memories are not linked to ND filter
settings in the following cases.
• When the number of memories allocated to
each of A and B is limited to one by setting
OPERATION >White Setting >Filter White
Memory in the setup menu to Off.
• When the electrical CC filter switching function
has been assigned to an assignable switch, or
when a remote control unit has been connected.
(In these cases, the contents of white balance
memory are linked to electrical CC filter
positions (A to D).)
Also, when OPERATION >White Setting
>White Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to
[ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)], and the
WHITE BAL switch is set to B, the ATW
function is activated to automatically adjust the
white balance of the picture being shot for
varying lighting conditions.
Setting the Electronic Shutter
56
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
The shutter modes that can be used with the
electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can
be selected are listed below.
Standard mode
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving
subjects with little blurring.
You can set the shutter speed in one of two shutter
modes: Speed mode, in which the speed is set in
seconds, and Angle mode, in which the speed is
set in degrees.
Speed mode
a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is
in Slow & Quick Motion mode and OPERATION
>Rec Function >Frame Rate in the setup menu is set
to a value that is greater than the system frequency.
Angle mode
180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, and 11.25°
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Select this mode for obtaining images with no
horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects
such as monitor screens.
As shown in the following tables, the range of
shutter speeds that can be set varies depending on
whether the Slow & Quick Motion (S&Q)
function is on or off.
System lines: 1080
System lines: 720
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode
Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level
lighting conditions.
Notes
• SLS mode cannot be used when the camcorder is in
Slow & Quick Motion mode.
• It is not possible to output the color bar signal, turn the
SLS mode on or off, or change the number of
accumulated frames when the number of accumulated
frames is set to 16, 32 or 64.
Notes
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as
the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of
field.
• The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the
current system frequency.
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
Shutter Modes
System
frequency
Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
59.94i
59.94P
50i
50P
1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000
29.97P 1/40 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
25P 1/33 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
23.98P 1/32 a), 1/48 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/96, 1/100,
1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
System
frequency
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)
S&Q: Off S&Q: On
59.94i 60.00 to 3800 —
50i 50.00 to 3500 —
29.97P 29.99 to 4100 32.01 to 4100
23.98P 23.99 to 3700 32.02 to 3700
25P 25.00 to 3900 32.03 to 3900
System
frequency
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)
S&Q: Off S&Q: On
59.94P 60.07 to 4100 32.01 to 4100
50P 50.03 to 3900 32.03 to 3900
29.97P 29.99 to 4100 32.01 to 4100
23.98P 23.99 to 3700 32.02 to 3700
25P 25.00 to 3900 32.03 to 3900
3D/2D Number of accumulated frames
3D 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
2D 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 32, 64
Selecting the Shutter Mode and
Shutter Speed
Setting the Electronic Shutter 57
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
To switch between Speed mode and
Angle mode
1Select OPEARTION >Shutter Select
>Shutter Select in the setup menu (see
page 119).
2Turn the MENU knob to select Second
or Degree, and then press the knob.
To set the shutter mode and standard-
mode shutter speed
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained
even when the camcorder power is turned off.
1Push the SHUTTER selector from ON
to SELECT.
The current shutter setting indication appears
for about three seconds.
2Before the shutter setting indication
disappears, push the SHUTTER
selector down to SELECT again and
repeat this until the desired mode or
speed appears.
When all modes and speeds are displayed,
the display changes in the following order.
Note
Depending on the frame rate setting (see page 82), some
shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick
Motion mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest
selectable shutter speed.
Example: If you perform Slow & Quick Motion
shooting when setting the frame rate to 60 and the video
format to HQ1280/29.97P
The shutter speed is indicated as follows.
When Slow & Quick Motion mode is off
1/40t1/50t1/60t1/100t...
When Slow & Quick Motion mode is on
1/60t1/60t1/60t1/100t...
To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS
mode
1Set the shutter mode to ECS or SLS (see
the previous item).
2Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired frequency or number of frames.
Speed Mode (with system frequency 59.94i)
ECS ModeSLS Mode
Adjusting the Iris
58
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
You can use the IRIS dial or the automatic iris
adjustment function to adjust the iris aperture.
Set the IRIS switch to MANU (IRIS dial
adjustment) or AUTO (automatic iris
adjustment).
Even when the IRIS switch is set to MANU,
pressing the PUSH AUTO button automatically
adjusts the iris while the button is held down.
Set the IRIS switch to MANU, and turn the IRIS
dial. Turn the dial clockwise to open the iris
aperture, and counterclockwise to close the iris
aperture (factory default setting).
The direction of rotation of the dial can be
changed using OPERATION >Dial Operation
>IRIS Clockwise in the setup menu.
Set the IRIS switch to AUTO. If the IRIS switch
is set to MANU, you can also press the PUSH
AUTO button to automatically adjust the iris
aperture.
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be changed to aid the shooting of clear
pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blown-
out highlights. The reference value for the lens
iris can be set within the following range with
respect to the standard value.
• 0.25 to 1 (increasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further open
• –0.25 to –1 (decreasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further close
Also you can set the area where light detection
occurs.
To change the reference value
1Set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Iris
Override in the setup menu to On (see
page 117).
2Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
3Turn the MENU knob to change the
reference value.
Note
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is
not ECS.
An indicator of the current reference value is
shown at the iris position indication (see
page 36) on the viewfinder screen.
To make the iris more open
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as
seen from the front of the camcorder.
Select one of 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, or 1.
To stop down the iris
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen
from the front of the camcorder.
Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1.
The changed reference value is retained until
the power of the camcorder is turned off.
Even if the reference value is changed, it
reverts to the standard value every time the
power is turned on.
To set the automatic iris window
1Set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Iris
Window Indication in the setup menu to
On.
The current automatic iris window appears
on the viewfinder screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris
window on the screen, set to Off.
2Turn the MENU knob to select Iris
Window, and then press the knob.
Adjusting the Iris
Changing the Adjustment Mode
Adjusting the Iris using the IRIS
Dial
Adjusting the Iris using Automatic
Iris Adjustment
Changing the Reference Value for
Automatic Iris Adjustment
Zooming 59
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
3Turn the MENU knob until the desired
auto iris window appears, and then
press the knob.
If you select “Var”, the following items
become effective and you can set the window
of the desired size. Set the following items
with MAINTENANCE >Auto Iris2.
When you exit the menu, the auto iris window
selected in step 3 appears.
Unless you need to keep this window displayed,
set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Iris Window
Indication in the setup menu to Off.
To counter problems with very bright
highlights
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too
much, leaving the overall image dark, or the
highlights may be blown out. In such cases,
setting the highlight clip function on reduces the
luminance range, avoiding problems from the
automatic iris correction.
Set OPERATION >Auto Iris >Clip High Light in
the setup menu to On.
You can use the ZOOM dial or the zoom lever to
operate the zoom.
Turn the ZOOM dial clockwise to zoom out for
wide-angle shots, and counterclockwise to zoom
in for long-distance shots (factory default
setting).
The direction of rotation of the dial can be
changed using OPERATION >Dial Operation
>Zoom Clockwise in the setup menu.
The zoom function can also be assigned to the
FOCUS dial or CONVERGENCE dial. The
function assigned to the dial can be changed using
OPERATION >Lens Dial >Mid or Inner in the
setup menu.
Push to the W (wide) side when you want wide-
angle, and push to the T (telephoto) side when
you want telephoto. The zoom speed increases
when you push the lever deeply, and decreases
when you push less deeply. The current lens
zoom position appears in the viewfinder, over the
range Z00 (wide-angle) to Z99 (telephoto) (see
page 34).
The zoom function can also be assigned to the
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches.
The function assigned to the ASSIGNABLE 4/5
switches can be changed using OPERATION
>Assignable SW in the setup menu.
The focal lengths for the lens zoom numbers (Z00
to Z99) displayed in the viewfinder are shown in
the following table for reference.
Item Setting
Iris Var Width The width of the window
Iris Var Height The height of the window
Iris Var H Pos The position of the window
in the horizontal direction
Iris Var V Pos. The position of the window
in the vertical direction.
The shaded parts indicate the
area where light detection
Zooming
Using the ZOOM Dial
Using the Zoom Lever
Adjusting the Focus
60
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
The camcorder allows you to adjust the focus in
the following two ways.
MF (manual focus) mode
In this mode, focusing is performed using the
FOCUS dial.
Auto focus is enabled temporarily when you press
the PUSH AF button.
You can also use the MF assist function.
AF (auto focus) mode
In this mode, auto focus is always enabled.
The FOCUS dial and the PUSH AF button are
also enabled.
Notes
• Subjecting the camcorder to severe shocks may cause
focus errors that subsist. If this occurs, turn the
camcorder power off and then on again.
• The lens is designed with an extra margin at the
infinity position (∞), to compensate for focus drifting
due to variations in temperature. When shooting a
subject at infinity in MF mode, check the picture in the
viewfinder as you focus.
When the FOCUS switch is set to MANU
(manual), MF mode is selected, in which auto
focus can be operated when necessary.
Adjusting using the FOCUS dial
Turn the FOCUS dial clockwise to focus on
closer subjects, and counterclockwise to focus on
distant subjects (factory default setting).
The direction of rotation of the dial can be
changed using OPERATION >Dial Operation
>Focus Clockwise in the setup menu.
The focus function can also be assigned to the
ZOOM dial or CONVERGENCE dial. The
function assigned to the dial can be changed using
OPERATION >Lens Dial >Outer or Inner in the
setup menu.
Display Focal Length Display Focal Length
Z00 7.5 mm
(5/16 inches)
Z60 24.4 mm
(31/32 inches)
Z10 9.1 mm
(3/8 inches)
Z70 29.7 mm
(1 3/16 inches)
Z20 11.1 mm
(7/16 inches)
Z80 36.1 mm
(1 7/16 inches)
Z30 13.5 mm
(9/16 inches)
Z90 44.0 mm
(1 3/4 inches)
Z40 16.5 mm
(21/32 inches)
Z99 52.5 mm
(2 1/8 inches)
Z50 20.0 mm
(13/16 inches)
Adjusting the Focus
Adjusting in MF Mode
Adjusting the Convergence 61
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
One-push auto focus
Press the PUSH AF button. Auto focus is enabled
temporarily (one-push auto focus).
One-push auto focus ends when the subject is
brought into focus.
MF assist function
When the MF assist function is on (see page 144),
auto focus starts when you stop adjusting with the
FOCUS dial, enabling fine adjustments with the
subject at the center of the screen.
Auto focusing by the MF assist function ends
when the fine adjustments end.
Peaking
You can turn the PEAKING knob on the
viewfinder to use the peaking function. Edges are
emphasized in the monitor picture, which
facilitates manual focusing.
The recorded video signals are not affected.
When you slide the FOCUS dial forward, and set
the FOCUS switch to AUTO, the focus mode
becomes AF mode, in which auto focus is always
active.
Focusing in AF mode
In AF mode, the camcorder monitors the video
for changes, and starts auto focus whenever it
detects a change. Auto focusing ends when the
subject is in focus, but the auto focus function
remains on standby.
In AF mode, you can also start auto focusing by
pressing the PUSH AF button or by turning the
FOCUS dial.
The camcorder convergence point can be adjusted
in the range 1.2 m (4 ft) to ∞ (infinity).
For details about the convergence point, see
page 14.
When the subject is in focus, you can
automatically set the convergence point to the
subject distance (auto convergence). Using auto
convergence, you can also set the convergence
point a fixed percentage (–20% to +20%) beyond
or in front of the focus distance.
After setting the convergence point using auto
convergence, you can also fine-tune the
convergence point by operating the dial or recall
convergence points set beforehand.
The camcorder supports the following three
methods for adjusting the convergence point
distance.
CONVERGENCE dial
Turning the dial adjusts the convergence point
forward or backward.
AUTO CONVERGENCE button
Pressing the button sets the convergence point to
the current focus distance.
Assignable switch
You can assign a convergence point distance to an
assignable switch. Pressing the assignable switch
sets the convergence point to the assigned
distance. You can assign different distances to
several assignable switches in advance, and then
easily switch the convergence point distance by
pressing each assignable switch when shooting.
Turn the CONVERGENCE dial clockwise to
move the convergence point toward you, and
counterclockwise to move the point further away
(factory default setting).
Adjusting in AF Mode
Adjusting the
Convergence
Adjusting using the
CONVERGENCE Dial
Changing the Viewfinder Display
62
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
The direction of rotation of the dial can be
changed using OPERATION >Dial Operation
>Conv. Clockwise in the setup menu.
The convergence function can also be assigned to
the ZOOM dial or FOCUS dial. The function
assigned to the dial can be changed using
OPERATION >Lens Dial >Outer or Mid in the
setup menu.
Press the AUTO CONVERGENCE button to set
the convergence distance to the current focus
distance.
You can also shift the convergence point so that it
is closer or further away than the focus point
using OPERATION >Auto Conv. >Adjust Point
in the setup menu.
You can record a convergence point distance in
an assignable switch. A convergence point
distance can be assigned to the following
assignable switches.
• ASSIGN. 1/3 switches
• ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches
• COLOR TEMP. button
Select an assignable switch using OPERATION
>Assignable SW in the setup menu, and then
select Convergence to record the current
convergence point distance in the switch. To use,
press the assignable switch to set the convergence
point to the distance recorded in the switch.
Assigning different distances to several
assignable switches allows you to easily switch
between multiple convergence point distances
when shooting.
You can change the image displayed in the
viewfinder using the VF DISPLAY SELECT
switch. Each time you press the VF DISPLAY
SELECT switch, the display changes in
sequence.
L: Displays the left lens image, in color.
R: Displays the right lens image, in color.
L+R: Displays an overlay of the left lens image
and the right lens image, in color, by
calculating the average for each pixel.
L-R: Displays the image obtained by subtracting
the right lens image from the left lens image
to emphasize the parallax.
3D: Displays the 3D image, in color.
Anaglyph: Displays a superimposed image
obtained by coloring the left lens image red
and the right lens image blue.
3D can be displayed in the supplied viewfinder
only.
Only left or right images can be displayed in DXF
series viewfinders.
In 2D playback mode, the left image is always
used when displaying thumbnails.
Note
The following functions cannot be used when L-R or
Anaglyph is selected.
• Expand focus
• Zebra pattern display
• Peaking display
The following function cannot be used when L+R is
selected.
• Expand focus
Adjusting using the AUTO
CONVERGENCE Button
Adjusting using the Assignable
Switches
Changing the Viewfinder
Display
Adjusting the Audio Level 63
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to
AUTO, the input levels of analog audio signals
recorded on each channel are adjusted
automatically. You can also make manual
adjustments.
Note
Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO,
the input levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted
automatically.
Target audio level for manual audio level
adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level
of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level
is excessive.
1To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO
IN CH1 or CH2 connector, set the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to
REAR.
To adjust both input signals, set both
switches to REAR.
2Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)
corresponding to the channel(s) selected
in step 1 to MANUAL.
3With the LEVEL control(s) for the
channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so
that the audio level meter shows up to
–20 dB for a normal input volume.
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
On MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu,
you can select which audio level control controls
the audio recording level of the input to each of
the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors. The
correspondences between the settings of the menu
items and the controls are as follows.
Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level
Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level
Note
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2)
knobs and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the
MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on
channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position
of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL
(CH1/CH2) knobs.
1Set either or both of the AUDIO IN
switch(es) to FRONT.
Adjusting the Audio
Level
Manually Adjusting the Audio
Levels of the Audio Inputs from
the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
Connectors
Target input level
Excessive input level
Setting Knob
Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC
LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Setting Knob
Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC
LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Manually Adjusting the Audio
Level of the MIC IN Connector
Adjusting the Audio Level
64
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
2Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for
the desired channel(s) selected in step 1
to MANUAL.
3Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and
adjust so that the audio level meter
shows up to –20 dB for a normal input
volume.
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
On MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup menu,
you can select which audio level control controls
the audio recording level of the front microphone
input. The correspondences between the settings
of the menu items and the controls are as follows.
MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level
MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level
Note
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control
and LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs linked together, if the
LEVEL (CH1/CH2) controls are set to 0, the audio
signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check
the position of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs before
adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.
Selecting the recorded audio
You can select the audio recorded on audio
channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4
switches.
You can have the selection made automatically,
as follows.
To automatically select the same audio as on
channels 1 and 2
Set MAINTENANCE >Audio >Audio CH3/4
Mode of the setup menu to [Ch 1/2].
Adjusting the audio recording levels
To adjust automatically
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch to
AUTO.
To adjust manually
1Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch
to MANUAL.
2Select the knobs that adjust the audio
levels with the Audio CH3 Level and
Audio CH4 Level items under
MAINTENANCE >Audio in the setup
menu.
Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording
level
Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording
level
Setting Knob
Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC
LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Setting Knob
Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC
LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Recording Audio on Channels 3
and 4
CH3 switch Channel 3 recording target
FRONT Front microphone audio
REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH-1 connector
WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio
CH4 switch Channel 4 recording target
FRONT Front microphone audio
REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH-2 connector
WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio
Setting Knob
Side3 LEVEL (CH3) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side3 LEVEL (CH3) knob and
MIC LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Setting the Time Data 65
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
You can now adjust the levels of audio
channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected
here.
Note
When picture cache mode is enabled, it is not possible to
set time data, even if you set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch to SET. If you want to set time data, first exit
picture cache mode.
This sets the recording timecode. In 3D record
mode, the same timecode is recorded to both left
and right media.
The timecode setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 :
00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds :
frames).
1Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
2Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET.
3Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes.
4Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the timecode value to 00:00:00:00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
5Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator
keeps running.
R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode
generator runs only while recording.
Note
If recording in 3D with the switch set to R-RUN,
recording continues to right media when the remaining
capacity in left media runs out. When this occurs, only
the right timecode advances. When recording to right
media stops, the left timecode is synchronized to the
right timecode.
Setting Knob
Side4 LEVEL (CH4) knob
Front MIC LEVEL control
Front+Side4 LEVEL (CH4) knob and
MIC LEVEL control (linked
operation)
Setting the Time Data
Setting the Timecode
Setting the Time Data
66
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame
mode
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-
drop frame (NDF) mode on MAINTENANCE
>Timecode in the setup menu.
To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the
media normally produces consecutive timecode.
However, once you remove the media and record
on another media, the timecode will no longer be
consecutive when you use the original media
again for recording. In this case, to make the
timecode consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch to REGEN.
Saving the real Time in the Timecode
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode.
When it is necessary to set the actual time, use
MAINTENANCE >Clock Set >Date/Time in the
setup menu.
For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the
Internal Clock” (page 45).
Note
If recording in 2D using Slow & Quick Motion mode, the
timecode is generated using R-RUN even if the switch is
set to CLOCK.
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal
digits), you can record user information such as
the date, time, or scene number on the timecode
track.
1Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
2Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
3Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
4Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the
desired operating mode for the
timecode generator.
To store the user bit setting in memory
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is
automatically retained in memory even when the
power is turned off.
You can synchronize the internal timecode
generator of this camcorder with an external
generator for the regeneration of an external
timecode. You can also synchronize the timecode
generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the
internal generator of this camcorder.
Connections for timecode
synchronization
Connect both the reference video signal and the
external timecode as illustrated below.
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external
timecode
Setting the User Bits
Synchronizing the Timecode
External timecode
1GENLOCK IN connector
2TC IN connector
Reference video signal
Setting the Time Data 67
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of
camcorders (including one reference
camcorder)
To lock the timecode to an external
source
1Turn on the POWER switch.
2Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET.
3Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN.
4Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
5Supply a timecode signal and a
reference video signal complying with
the SMPTE standard and in proper
phase relationship, to the TC IN
connector and to the GENLOCK IN
connector, respectively.
This operation synchronizes the internal
timecode generator with the external
timecode. After about 10 seconds, you can
disconnect the external timecode without
losing the synchronization.
Notes
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal
timecode is immediately synchronized with the
external timecode and the counter display will show
the value of the external timecode. However, wait for
a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before
recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the
same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the
camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a
case, the internal timecode is not correctly
synchronized with the external timecode.
User bit settings during timecode
synchronization
When the timecode is synchronized, only the time
data is synchronized with the external timecode
value.
To release the timecode synchronization
First disconnect the external timecode, then set
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
To change the power supply from the battery
pack to an external power supply during
timecode synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect
the external power supply to the DC IN connector
before removing the battery pack. You may lose
timecode synchronization if you remove the
battery pack first.
Camcorder synchronization during timecode
synchronization
During timecode synchronization, the camcorder
is genlocked to the reference video signal input
from the GENLOCK IN connector.
1VIDEO OUT connector
2TC OUT connector
3TC IN connector
4GENLOCK IN connector
To another camcorder to be synchronized
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information (Status Screens)
68
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
The status screens allow you to check camcorder
settings and various types of status information.
There are five status screens, listed below.
To display status screens
With no menu is displayed, push the STATUS
ON/SEL/OFF switch up to the ON/SEL side.
Each push selects the next status screen, in the
order given in the table above.
CAMERA status screen
This screen displays settings and status
information related to shooting.
White Bal: White balance status
Gain: GAIN switch status
Zoom Speed: Zoom speed set with the lens
ZOOM button
Zebra: Zebra status
Skin Detail: Skin details status
AUDIO status screen
This screen displays settings and status
information related to audio input and output.
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4: Audio level meters
and input sources
Wind Filter: Wind filter settings
VIDEO status screen
This screen displays settings and status
information related to recording and playback.
Video Format: Video format
Rec Mode: Recording bit rate
Output: Output signal setting
SDI Output (L): HD/SD SDI OUT(L) connector
output setting
SDI Output (R): HD/SD SDI OUT(R) connector
output setting
HDMI Output: HDMI connector output setting
Down Converter: SD output down converter
setting
ASSIGN SWITCH status screen
This screen displays the names of the functions
assigned to assignable switches
Checking Camcorder
Settings and Status
Information (Status
Screens)
Status screen Information displayed
CAMERA status Settings and status information
related to shooting
AUDIO status Settings and status information
related to audio input and
output
VIDEO status Settings and status information
related to recording and
playback
ASSIGN
SWITCH status
Names of functions assigned
to assignable switches
BATTERY/
MEDIA status
Status of the battery mounted
on the camcorder and the
media status
Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information (Status Screens) 69
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings
BATTERY/MEDIA status screen
This screen displays the status of the battery
mounted on the camcorder and the media status.
Battery: The remaining battery capacity
Charge Count: The number of times the battery
has been charged
Media A/Media B:
• Remaining capacity of media
• Recordable time
• Approximate writable lifetime (Life)
“Life 100%” is shown for unused media.
Handling SxS Memory Cards
70
Chapter 4 Shooting
This camcorder records video and audio on SxS
memory cards (not supplied) loaded into one or
both of its memory card slots.
The MEAD-MS01/SD01 Media Adaptor can also
be used for recording. For details, refer to the
Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled
“Manuals for Solid-State Memory 3D
Camcorder”).
SxS memory cards that can be used with
this camcorder
Use the following Sony SxS memory cards (SxS
PRO or SxS-1) with this camcorder.
SxS PRO
• SBP-16 (16 GB)
• SBP-32 (32 GB)
SxS-1
• SBS-32G1A (32 GB)
• SBS-64G1A (64 GB)
Proper operation cannot be guaranteed when
memory cards other than SxS PRO and SxS-1 are
used.
The memory cards listed above comply with the
ExpressCard memory card standard.
• SxS, SxS PRO and SxS-1 are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
• The ExpressCard label and logo are property of
the Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association (PCMCIA) and are
licensed to Sony Corporation. Other trademarks
and trade names are the property of their
respective owners.
Notes on the use of SxS memory cards
• Recorded data may be lost or corrupted in the
following cases.
- When the camcorder is subjected to shock or
vibrations during reading, writing, or
formatting of an SxS memory card, and when
the camcorder is powered off or an SxS
memory card is removed during reading,
writing, or formatting
- When the camcorder is used in an
environment subject to static electricity or
electric noise
• Do not use or store SxS memory cards in
locations that are:
- Outside the specified environmental ranges
- Very hot, such in as vehicles parked in the sun
during summer, or exposed to direct sunlight,
or near heaters
- Subject to high humidity and corrosion
• When inserting a memory card, insert with the
label side facing the correct direction.
• Carry and store SxS memory cards in their
cases, and lock the cases securely.
• Guard against accidents and inadvertent data
loss by backing up the data stored on SxS
memory cards. Sony cannot be responsible for
any consequences of damage to or loss of data
stored on SxS memory cards.
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied
labels in the designated label space. When
attaching a label, make sure it does not protrude
beyond the label space.
Chapter4Shooting
Handling SxS Memory
Cards
About SxS Memory Cards
Handling SxS Memory Cards 71
Chapter 4 Shooting
• Use this camcorder to format SxS memory
cards that will be used with this camcorder.
When memory cards are formatted on another
unit, the format is regarded as an invalid format,
making it necessary to format the memory cards
again.
However, note that the format and delete
functions of this camcorder do not completely
remove data from memory cards. Before
discarding or disposing of a memory card, erase
it using commercial data erasure software, or
physically destroy it. Sony cannot be
responsible for any failure to erase data
completely.
• Clip operations may not be possible when the
remaining capacity of the media is low. In this
case, use a computer to delete unneeded files
and try again.
• Open the memory card case completely before
storing a card in the case or removing a card
from the case.
Preventing accidental erasure
You can prevent accidental recording, editing,
and deletion of data on an SxS memory card by
setting the write protect switch to the WP side.
Note
Do not touch the write protect switch while an SxS
memory card is loaded in a card slot. Eject the card
before setting the write protect switch.
To load SxS memory cards
1Slide the cover to the left to open.
2Insert an SxS memory card into a card
slot.
The ACCESS lamp lights in orange, and then
lights in green to indicate that the memory
card is usable.
3Close the cover.
ACCESS lamp status indications
Card slots each have an ACCESS lamp to indicate
the slot status.
SxS PRO 8GB
Label space
Write protect switch
Loading and Ejecting SxS Memory
Cards
Lamp Slot status
Lights in orange Accessing the SxS memory card
(lights during data reading and
writing)
Lights in green Standby (the loaded SxS
memory card is ready for
recording or playback)
Not lit • No SxS memory card is loaded.
• An unusable card is loaded.
• An SxS memory card is loaded,
but the other slot is selected.
Insert with the label
side facing right.
Handling SxS Memory Cards
72
Chapter 4 Shooting
To eject SxS memory cards
1Open the cover, and then press the
EJECT button to release the lock and
pull the button out.
2Press the EJECT button again to eject
the card.
Note
Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the
camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card
is being accessed. Doing so may corrupt all data recorded
on the card. Always make sure that the ACCESS lamp is
lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or
remove a memory card.
Switching using the SLOT SELECT button
You can switch between slot A and slot B using
the SLOT SELECT button. Both left and right
slots are switched.
Note
If only one memory card is inserted in the left slots (A or
B), you cannot switch between slots using the SLOT
SELECT button, except under the following conditions.
• When recording to media in the right slots
• When displaying the all clip thumbnails screen for
media in right slots
If there is no memory card inserted in either left
slots and memory cards are inserted in both right
slots (A and B), then pressing the SLOT SELECT
button will switch between slot A and slot B on
the right side.
Switching when a memory card is full
If a memory card becomes full while recording,
the camcorder automatically switches between
slots A and B. If recording to both left and right
slots, slots A and B are switched on both the left
and right sides.
When memory card is full on one side only
When recording to the A slots on both the left and
right sides and either of these memory cards
becomes full, the camcorder switches and
continues recording to the B slots if there is
recordable media in both B slots. If either of the
memory cards in the B slots on the left or right
side is not recordable, then either recording
continues on the slot A card that is not full or
recording stops on both left and right sides,
according to the setting using OPERATION
>Format >3D Single Rec in the setup menu.
When recording to memory cards on one side
only
When recording to slot A on the left side and the
memory card becomes full, the camcorder
switches recording to slot B on the left side if the
memory card is recordable. If the only recordable
memory card is in slot B on the right side,
recording stops.
Press the button once
to release the lock.
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to
Use
Handling SxS Memory Cards 73
Chapter 4 Shooting
Note
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback.
Even when pressed, it does not change the selected slot.
Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail screen
(see page 89) is displayed.
When you load an unformatted SxS memory card,
or load an SxS memory card that has been
formatted to other specifications, a message
“Cannot Use Media(A)/Unsupported File
System” appears in the viewfinder. In this case,
format the memory card in the following way.
Note
SxS memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM
EX device. Cards in other formats cannot be used.
To format (initialize) a memory card
1Select OPERATION >Format Media in
the setup menu (see page 105).
2Select the slot to format.
3Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
The confirmation message for formatting is
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
4Turn the MENU knob to select
“Execute”, and press the knob.
Execution of the format starts.
During execution of the format, a progress
indication appears (%), and the ACCESS lamp
lights in orange.
Recording and playback during format execution
Even during execution of a format, recording and
playback are possible using an SxS memory card
loaded into the other card slot.
If the format operation fails
A format operation may fail because the SxS
memory card is write protected, or because it is
not the type of card specified for use with this
camcorder.
In this case, an error message appears. Following
the instructions in the error message and
exchange the card for an SxS memory card that
can be used with this camcorder.
Notes
• All data is erased when you format a memory card,
including setup files and all of the recorded video data.
• Use the format function of this camcorder to format
SxS memory cards for use on this camcorder. The
formats of cards formatted on other devices are not
recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to
format them again on this camcorder.
You can check the remaining capacity of the SxS
memory cards loaded in the A and B slots by
checking the recording media remaining capacity
display in the viewfinder.
The camcorder calculates the remaining
recording time for the media in each slot on the
basis of the current video format (recording bit
rate), and displays it in units of minutes.
When media is inserted in both the left and right
slots, and the camcorder is recording or can
record to both, the left or right media with the
lower remaining recording time is displayed.
When the camcorder is recording or can record to
left slots or right slots only, the remaining
recording time for that media is displayed.
You can also check the remaining time in the
BATTERY/MEDIA status screen (see page 69).
Note
The mark appears when a memory card is write
protected.
When to exchange SxS memory cards
During recording, a “Media Near Full (Left)” or
“Media Near Full (Right)” warning message
appears, the WARNING indicator and the REC
indicator on the viewfinder screen flash, and the
buzzer sounds when the remaining recording time
of the memory cards falls below five minutes.
Exchange the memory card for media with
available recording capacity.
If you continue recording, a “Media Full (Left)”
or “Media Full (Right)” message appears and
Formatting (Initializing) SxS
Memory Cards
Checking the Remaining
Recording Time
Handling SxS Memory Cards
74
Chapter 4 Shooting
recording stops when the remaining recording
time falls to 0.
The method for determining the remaining
recording time is different in 3D record mode and
2D record mode.
3D record mode
In 3D record mode, the 3D remaining recording
time for both slots A and B is first calculated. The
warning display when the 3D remaining
recording time falls below 5 minutes or when it
reaches 0 is based on the remaining recording
time of the media in left and right slots.
2D record mode
The warning display is based on the calculation of
the total of the remaining recording time for both
slots A and B on each side (left and right).
Note
About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS
memory card.
The display of remaining recording time changes to “0”
and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip
limit is reached.
If for any reason an error should occur in a
memory card, the card must be restored before
use.
When you load an SxS memory card that needs to
be restored, a message appears in the viewfinder
to ask whether you want to restore it.
To restore a card
Turn the MENU knob to select “Execute”, and
then press the knob.
The restoration starts.
During the restoration, a execution message
appears, the progress is displayed (%), and the
ACCESS lamp lights in orange.
When the restoration finishes, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
If restoration fails
• Write protected SxS memory cards and cards on
which memory errors have occurred cannot be
restored. A warning message appears for such
cards. Follow the instructions in the message
and unprotect the card or replace it with another
card.
• SxS memory cards on which memory errors
have occurred may become usable if they are
reformatted.
• In some cases, some clips can be restored while
others cannot. The restored clips can be played
normally.
• If the message “Could not Restore Some Clips”
keeps appearing after repeated attempts at
restoration, it may be possible to restore the SxS
memory card with the following procedure.
1Use the camcorder’s copy function (see
page 96) or the supplied application
software (see page 154) to copy the
required clips to another SxS memory
card.
2Format the unusable SxS memory card on
the camcorder.
3Copy the required clips back to the newly
formatted SxS memory card.
Recording and playback during restoration
Even while restoration is in progress, you can
record and play an SxS memory card in the other
card slot.
Note
For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder,
be sure to use this camcorder. Media recorded with a
device other than this camcorder or with another
camcorder of different version (even of the same model)
may not be restored using this camcorder.
Restoring SxS Memory Cards
Basic Operations 75
Chapter 4 Shooting
This section explains the basic shooting and
recording procedures.
Before starting to shoot, inspect the camera
system to verify that it is operating properly.
1Attach a fully charged battery pack (see
page 37).
2Load one or two SxS memory cards (see
page 71).
When recording in 3D, insert memory cards
in both the left and right slots. If memory
cards are inserted in both slots A and B, the
camcorder automatically switches to the
second card when the first card becomes full.
3Set the camcorder’s POWER switch
(see page 18) to ON.
4Make the following settings.
3D/2D: 3D or 2D (see page 52)
Marker display: On (see page 113)
Iris: Auto (see page 58)
Zoom: Auto (see page 59)
Camera output: Select the picture currently
being shot (camera picture), and turn the
DCC function on (see page 24)
Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free
Run) or R-RUN (Rec Run) (see page 65)
Audio input channel selection: Auto (see
page 31)
5Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the
BLACK side to adjust the black balance
(see page 53).
6Select a filter according to the lighting
conditions, and adjust the white balance
(see page 54).
7Point the camcorder at the subject, and
adjust the focus (see page 60) and zoom.
8When recording in 3D, adjust the
convergence (see page 61).
9If you are using the electronic shutter,
select an appropriate shutter mode and
speed (see page 56).
10 Do one of the following to start
recording.
- Press the REC START button (see
page 22).
- Press the VTR button (see page 20).
- Turn on the assignable switch to which the
Rec function has been assigned (see
page 143).
During recording, the TALLY indicators, the
tally indicator on the front panel of the
viewfinder, and the REC indication on the
viewfinder screen light. Adjust the zoom and
focus as required.
Notes
• Never remove the battery pack while the
camcorder is recording (while the ACCESS lamp
on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the
ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in
orange). Doing so risks the loss of several
seconds of data before the recording was
interrupted, because internal processing will not
end normally.
• The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F
FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do
not function during recording.
11 To stop recording, perform one of the
operations listed in step 9.
The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on
the front panel of the viewfinder, and the
REC indication on the viewfinder screen go
out, and camcorder enters recording standby
(STBY) mode.
A clip is created from the video and audio
data and the metadata recorded between steps
9 and 10.
To check the recording (recording review)
With the camcorder in recording standby
(STBY) mode, turn on the assignable switch
to which the Rec Review function or the
Freeze Mix function has been assigned (see
page 142).
The camcorder plays the entire last clip, or
the last few seconds of that clip (3 seconds or
10 seconds), and then returns to standby
mode.
Basic Operations
Basic Operations
76
Chapter 4 Shooting
You can use MAINTENANCE >Camera
Config >Rec Review in the setup menu (see
page 134) to change the playback time.
When the Rec Review function is assigned to
the RET button, you can also conduct a
review by using the RET button.
12 Repeat steps 9 and 10 to continue
recording.
With each repetition, another clip is created
on the memory card.
Notes
• You cannot resume recording for about one second
after stopping recording.
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on
one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card has
enough free capacity to record more clips, when 600
clips have been recorded, no further recording is
possible.
Clip file sizes
The XDCAM EX-series products limit the
maximum file size of a clip to 4 GB.
If you continue recording for an extended period,
recorded materials may be segmented into
multiple files, depending on the file size (the
maximum number of partitions is 99).
The camcorder regards continuous recording as
one clip even if it has been segmented into
multiple files.
Clip names
The camcorder automatically furnishes a nine-
character clip name (for 3D clips) or eight-
character clip name (for 2D clips) to each
recorded clip.
Example: ABCD001L
ABCD: Four-character alphanumeric prefix. You
can change the prefix to an arbitrary length (4
to 46 characters) using OPERATION >Clip
>Title Prefix in the setup menu. (The prefix
cannot be changed after recording begins.)
0001: Four-digit number that automatically
increments as each clip is recorded. When
recording in 3D, the media in the left slots
and right slots are compared, and the larger
number of the two is appended to both clips.
L: When recording in 3D, “L” is appended to left
image clips and “R” to right image clips.
When recording to 2D, no suffix is added.
When the camcorder is in standby (STBY) mode,
you can play all or part of the most recently
recorded clip (see page 75).
1Insert the SxS memory card to play (see
page 71).
2Press the PREV button (see page 26) or
the F REV button (see page 26) to cue
up the clip to play.
3Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the
playback picture appears in the viewfinder.
To pause the playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes during
pause.
Press the button again to return to playback mode.
To play at high speed
Press the F FWD button (see page 26) or the
F REV button (see page 26).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
To switch between memory cards
When memory cards are loaded in both slots A
and B, press the SLOT SELECT button (see
page 29) to select the active slot.
It is not possible to switch between memory cards
during playback.
To end playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback
stops, and a thumbnail screen (see page 89)
appears in the viewfinder.
Playback also stops and the timecode screen
appears in the viewfinder when you start
recording during playback, and when you eject an
SxS memory card.
Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3
Playing Recorded Clips
Advanced Operations 77
Chapter 4 Shooting
You can use the assignable switches to delete the
last recorded clips (Last Clip DEL function).
For clips recorded in 3D, both the left and right
clips are deleted.
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to delete all
recorded clips (All Clips DEL function) or to delete
selected clips. For details, see “Deleting Clips”
(page 97).
1Turn on the assignable switch to which
the Last Clip DEL function has been
assigned (see page 143).
A confirmation message appears.
2Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
On this camcorder, two types of shot marks are
available. You can record them at user-specified
positions to make it easier for editors to cue up
those positions.
You can record up to 127 shot marks per clip.
For clips recorded in 3D, shot marks are recorded
for clips in left slots only. However, shot marks
are recorded for clips in right slots when
recording to right slots only in 3D mode using the
3D Single Rec setting or when recording to right
slots only in 2D mode.
You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to add and
delete shot marks in clips. For details, see “Adding
and Deleting Shot Marks” (page 99).
To record shot marks
Do one of the following.
• Turn on an assignable switch to which Shot
Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2 has been assigned (see
page 142).
• If Lens RET has been assigned to the RET
button, operate as follows.
To record shot mark 1: Press the RET button
once.
To record shot mark 2: Press the RET button
twice in quick succession.
When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark 1” or
“Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the
viewfinder for about three seconds near the
timecode indication.
To make it easier for editors to select good clips,
you can set OK marks in clips.
OK marks are set for clips recorded in both left
and right slots.
Note
OK marks cannot be set or deleted during recording or
playback.
Deleting Recorded Clips Advanced Operations
Recording Shot Marks
Setting OK Marks
Advanced Operations
78
Chapter 4 Shooting
To add/delete OK marks
You use the THUMBNAIL menu to add and
delete OK marks in previously recorded clips.
For details, see “Adding and Deleting OK Marks”
(page 96).
The camcorder is equipped with enough internal
memory to pre-store up to 15 seconds of video
and audio data in a picture cache. This allows you
to begin recording a specified number of seconds
in advance of the time when you press a recording
start button.
Note
In 3D mode, the picture cache record function cannot be
used.
Selecting picture cache mode and setting
the picture cache time
Before recording in picture cache mode, you must
select picture cache mode and set the picture
cache time (the number of seconds of video and
audio data stored to memory) in the
OPERATION menu.
The picture cache time determines how far in
advance you can start recording, counting back in
seconds from the operation that starts recording.
Note that it may not be possible to start this far in
advance in the special cases explained in the
following notes.
Notes
• Storage of picture data to memory begins when you
select picture cache mode. Therefore, if you start
recording immediately after selecting picture cache
mode, the picture data from before the selection is not
recorded.
• No data is recorded to picture cache memory during
playback or recording review and display of
thumbnails. It is not possible to record picture data
from the time you were conducting playback or a
recording review.
To select picture cache mode and set the picture
cache time
Notes
• Picture cache recording is not possible in Frame Rec,
Interval Rec, and Slow & Quick Motion mode. The
camcorder exits Frame Rec, Interval Rec, or Slow &
Quick Motion mode whenever you select picture cache
mode. The camcorder exits picture cache mode
automatically whenever you select Frame Rec,
Interval Rec, or Slow & Quick Motion mode.
• The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared
when you change the system settings, for example by
selecting a different video format. Picture data from
before the change is not recorded even if you start
recording immediately after the change. The
camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically.
• It is not possible to set the picture cache time during
recording.
1In the setup menu, select OPERATION
>Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 101).
2Turn the MENU knob to select [On],
and then press the knob.
3Select [P. Cache Rec Time], turn the
MENU knob to select the desired
picture cache time, and then press the
knob.
You can select from 0-2sec, 2-4sec, 4-6sec,
6-8sec, 8-10sec, 10-12sec, 12-14sec, and
13-15sec.
Once made, picture cache mode settings remain
in effect until changed.
Instead of carrying out steps 1 and 2, you can also
select picture cache mode by using an assignable
switch to which the Picture Cache function has
been assigned (see page 142).
Camcorder data handling while recording in
picture cache mode
Recording procedures in picture cache mode are
basically the same as normal recording
procedures. However, note the following
differences with respect to how the camcorder
handles video, time, and output data.
• If you start recording while the media is being
accessed, the start point of the video that is
actually recorded may be later than the
currently specified picture cache time. Because
the delay increases as the number of recorded
clips increases, you should avoid rapid start-
and-stop recording operations in picture cache
mode.
Starting to Record from Pre-
stored Video (Picture Cache
Function) (2D mode only)
Advanced Operations 79
Chapter 4 Shooting
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
internal timecode generator is always F-RUN.
• In picture cache mode, you cannot set time data
by setting the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
To set time data, exit picture cache mode.
• If the remaining free capacity of the media in
the currently selected slot is less than the picture
cache time, and the media in the other slot has
enough remaining capacity, then data is
recorded to the media in the other slot.
However, no data is recorded when there is no
media in the other slot, and when the media in
the other slot does not have enough remaining
capacity. (A message appears in the viewfinder
to inform you that there is not enough remaining
capacity.)
• Shot marks are not recorded if they are set
before the recording start operation.
If power is lost during recording
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to
OFF, the camcorder is powered off
automatically after a few seconds, during which
the media is accessed to record the video and
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up
to that point.
• If power is lost because the battery was
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side,
then the video and audio data stored in memory
is lost. The data stored in memory is not
recorded. Be careful to avoid this when
exchanging the battery.
The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows
you to capture time-lapse video to the
camcorder’s internal memory. This function is an
effective way to shoot slow-moving subjects.
When you start recording, the camcorder
automatically records a specified number of
frames at a specified interval time.
A pre-lighting function is available when Interval
Rec is enabled. This function automatically turns
on a video light before recording starts, which
allows you to record pictures under stable light
and color temperature conditions.
Interval Rec settings and shooting
Notes
• The Interval Rec function cannot be used at the same
time as the picture cache, Frame Rec, or Slow & Quick
Motion function. When you select Interval Rec mode,
the picture cache, Frame Rec, and Slow & Quick
Motion functions are disabled. When you select
picture cache, Frame Rec, or Slow & Quick Motion
mode, the Interval Rec function is disabled.
• The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared
when you change the system settings, for example by
selecting a different video format. Picture data from
before the change is not recorded even if you start
recording immediately after the change. The
camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically.
• Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during
recording.
To make Interval Rec settings
1Select OPERATION >Rec Function
>Interval Rec in the setup menu.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 101).
2Turn the MENU knob to select [On],
and then press the knob.
The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode, the
“Interval” indication on the viewfinder
screen flashes.
Recording Time-lapse Video
(Interval Rec Function)
Interval time
Number of frames in one take
Advanced Operations
80
Chapter 4 Shooting
3Select [Number of Frames], turn the
MENU knob to select the number of
frames to record in one take, and then
press the knob.
You can select from 1, 3, 6, 9 (or from 2, 6,
12 when the video format setting is 720/
59.94P or 720/50P).
4Select [Interval Time], turn the MENU
knob to select the desired interval, and
then press the knob.
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec,
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, 1 to 4/6/12/24
hour.
5As required, select [Pre-Lighting], turn
the MENU knob to select the length of
lighting time before recording starts,
and then press the knob.
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec,
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, 1 to 4/6/12/24
hour.
Notes
• If you want to turn the video light on before the start of
recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT switch to
[AUTO]. The video light’s switch must also be turned
on. When this is done, the video light turns on and off
automatically. However, the video light remains lit
when the time that it is off is five seconds or less.
• If you set the LIGHT switch to [MANUAL] and turn
the video light’s switch on, the video light is always lit.
(It does not go on and off automatically.)
The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is
powered off, but the number of frames, interval
time, and pre-lighting settings are maintained.
You do not need to set them again the next time
you shoot in Interval Rec mode.
To shoot in Interval Rec mode
Make the settings and preparations described in
“Basic Operations” (page 75), secure the
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
shooting.
When recording starts, the “Interval” indication
in the viewfinder changes from flashing to lit, and
“INT REC” and “INT STBY” appear
alternatively at the position of the REC
indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally
indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light
as they do during normal recording.
If you are using the pre-lighting function, the
video light comes on before recording starts.
To stop shooting
Stop the recording.
When shooting ends, the video data stored in
memory up to that point is written to the media.
To exit Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.
• With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set OPERATION >Rec Function >Interval Rec
in the setup menu to “Off”.
Limitations during recording
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
internal timecode generator is always F-RUN.
• Audio cannot be recorded.
• Recording review is not possible.
• If you press the SLOT SELECT button, the
camcorder completes recording of the specified
number of frames, creates a clip, and switches
to the other media.
• Genlock is not possible.
If power is lost during recording
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to
OFF, the camcorder is powered off
automatically after a few seconds, during which
the media is accessed to record the video and
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up
to that point.
• If power is lost because the battery was
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side,
then the video and audio data shot up to that
point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds). Be
careful to avoid this when exchanging the
battery.
The Frame Rec function is useful for shooting
stop motion animations, such as animations with
puppets or clay figures.
Each time that you press the recording start
button, the camcorder shoots a specified number
of frames and then stops.
Shooting Stop Motion Animations
(Frame Rec Function)
Advanced Operations 81
Chapter 4 Shooting
Frame Rec settings and shooting
Notes
• The Frame Rec function cannot be used at the same
time as the picture cache, Interval Rec, or Slow &
Quick Motion function. When you select Frame Rec
mode, the picture cache, Interval Rec, and Slow &
Quick Motion functions are disabled. When you select
picture cache, Interval Rec, or Slow & Quick Motion
mode, the Frame Rec function is disabled.
• The data stored in memory is cleared when you change
the system settings, for example by selecting a
different video format. Picture data from before the
change is not recorded even if you start recording
immediately after the change. The camcorder exits
Frame Rec mode automatically.
• Frame Rec settings cannot be changed during
recording.
To make Frame Rec settings
1Select OPERATION >Rec Function
>Frame Rec in the setup menu.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 101).
2Turn the MENU knob to select [On],
and then press the knob.
The camcorder enters Frame Rec mode, the
“Frame Rec” indication on the viewfinder
screen flashes.
3Select [Number of Frames], turn the
MENU knob to select the number of
frames to record in one take, and then
press the knob.
You can select from 1, 3, 6, 9 (or from 2, 6,
12 when the video format setting is 720/
59.94P or 720/50P).
The camcorder exits Frame Rec mode when it is
powered off, but the setting for the number of
frames setting is maintained. You do not need to
set it again the next time you shoot in Frame Rec
mode.
To shoot in Frame Rec mode
Make the settings and preparations described in
“Basic Operations” (page 75), secure the
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
shooting.
When recording starts, the “Frame Rec”
indication in the viewfinder changes from
flashing to lit, and “FRM REC” and “FRM
STBY” appear alternatively at the position of the
REC indication. The TALLY indicators and the
tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder
light as they do during normal recording.
To stop shooting
Stop the recording.
When shooting ends, the video data stored in
memory up to that point is written to the media.
To exit Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
• Set the POWER switch to OFF
• With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set OPERATION >Rec Function >Interval Rec
in the setup menu to [Off].
Limitations during recording
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
internal timecode generator is always R-RUN.
• Audio cannot be recorded.
• Recording review is not possible.
• If you press the SLOT SELECT button, the
camcorder completes recording of the specified
number of frames, creates a clip, and switches
to the other media.
• Genlock is not possible.
If power is lost during recording
• If you set the camcorder’s POWER switch to
OFF, the camcorder is powered off
automatically after a few seconds, during which
the media is accessed to record the video and
audio data stored in the camcorder’s memory up
to that point.
• If power is lost because the battery was
removed, the DC cable was disconnected, or the
power was turned off on the AC adaptor side,
then the video and audio data shot up to that
point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds). Be
careful to avoid this when exchanging the
battery.
Advanced Operations
82
Chapter 4 Shooting
When the camcorder is in HD mode and the video
format (see page 51) is set to one of the formats
listed below, you can specify a recording frame
rate that is different from the playback frame rate.
When the Country setting is [NTSC Area]/
[NTSC Area(J)]: HQ 1920/29.97P, HQ
1920/23.98P, HQ 1280/59.94P, HQ 1280/
29.97P, HQ 1280/23.98P
When the Country setting is [PAL Area]: HQ
1920/25P, HQ 1280/50P, HQ 1280/25P
By shooting with a frame rate that differs from the
playback frame rate, you can obtain slow and
quick motion effects that are smoother than low-
speed or high-speed playback of content recorded
at the normal frame rate.
Example
When the video format is HQ 1280/23.98P, you
can obtain quick-motion effects by setting the
frame rate to 1 to 23, and obtain slow-motion
effects by setting the frame rate to 25 to 60.
Slow & Quick Motion settings and
shooting
Notes
• The Slow & Quick Motion function cannot be used at
the same time as the picture cache, Interval Rec, or
Frame Rec function. When you select Slow & Quick
Motion mode, the picture cache, Interval Rec, and
Frame Rec functions are disabled. When you select
picture cache, Frame Rec, or Interval Rec mode, the
Slow & Quick Motion function is disabled.
• Slow & Quick Motion is disabled when the slow
shutter function (viewfinder display “SLS”) function is
enabled. The slow shutter function is disabled when
the Slow & Quick Motion function is enabled.
• Slow & Quick Motion settings cannot be changed
during recording.
• The left slot and right slot shutter timing may vary
when recording to both left and right slots in 2D mode.
To make Slow & Quick Motion settings
1Select OPERATION >Rec Function
>Slow & Quick in the setup menu.
For menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 101).
2Turn the MENU knob to select [On],
and then press the knob.
The camcorder enters Slow & Quick Motion
mode, and the “S&Q STBY” indication in
the viewfinder lights.
3Select [Frame Rate], turn the MENU
knob to select the recording frame rate,
and then press the knob.
The setting range for the frame rate is as
follows.
When you finish making these settings, the
system frequency and the frame rate appear at the
top of the viewfinder screen. You can change the
frame rate while viewing the display in the
viewfinder by turning the MENU knob.
The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and the
frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is
powered off.
To shoot in Slow & Quick Motion mode
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 75).
When recording starts, the “S&Q STBY”
indication in the viewfinder changes to the
“zS&Q REC” indication. The TALLY
indicators and the tally indicator on the front
panel of the viewfinder light as they do during
normal recording.
To stop shooting
Stop the recording.
Note
It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when
Frame Rate is set to a low value (for a slow frame rate).
To exit Slow & Quick Motion mode
With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set OPERATION >Rec Function >Slow & Quick
in the setup menu to “Off”.
Limitations during recording
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the advance mode of the
internal timecode generator is always R-RUN.
• Audio cannot be recorded when the recording
and playback frame rates differ.
Shooting with Slow & Quick
Motion
3D/2D System lines Frame rate
2D 1080 1 to 30
720 1 to 60
3D 1080 17 to 30
720 17 to 60
Advanced Operations 83
Chapter 4 Shooting
• Recording review is not possible.
• If you change the recording frame rate to a value
faster than the current shutter speed, the shutter
speed is changed to the slowest value for which
shooting is possible.
Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter
speed is 1/40, and you change the frame rate to
55, then the shutter speed is changed to 1/60.
If is not possible to select a shutter speed that is
slower than the recording frame rate.
• Genlock is not possible.
The freeze mix function allows you to
temporarily overlap a still image (freeze picture)
from a clip onto the current camera picture. This
makes it easier to frame the shot.
In 3D mode, an image from the left slot clip
overlaps the left-lens input image.
Note
The freeze mix function is not available in the following
cases.
• When the video formats of the recorded picture and the
camera picture differ
• When you are shooting in Slow & Quick Motion mode
or slow shutter mode
To display a freeze mix picture
1Play a clip or conduct a recording
review of a clip with the same format as
the camera picture.
2Display the picture that you want to use
as the frame, and then turn on the
assignable switch to which the Freeze
Mix function has been assigned.
The recording review picture is frozen and
overlaps the camera picture.
Note
The following functions are disabled at the freeze mix
times.
• Menu operations
• During Focus Mag display
• Marker display
• Zebra display
• Peaking display
• Skin details display
To cancel the freeze mix display
Do one of the following.
• Press an assignable switch again to which the
Freeze Mix function has been assigned.
The freeze mix display is canceled and the
display returns to the normal camera picture.
• Start recording (see page 75).
Normal recording starts.
Framing Shots with the Freeze
Mix Function
Planning Metadata Operations
84
Chapter 4 Shooting
Planning metadata is information about shooting
and recording plans, recorded in an XML file.
Example of a planning metadata file
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark
names defined in advance in a planning metadata
file.
Left slots only are used when loading planning
metadata files from SxS memory cards or writing
planning metadata files to SxS memory cards.
Right slots cannot be used.
The camcorder can display clip names and shot
mark names defined in the following languages.
•English
• Chinese
•German
• French 1)
• Italian
• Spanish
•Dutch
1)
• Portuguese
•Swedish
•Norwegian
•Danish
•Finnish
1)
1) Some characters are displayed as different but similar
characters.
Note
If you define clip name and shot mark names in
languages other than the above, they may not be
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
On the viewfinder screen, only alphanumeric characters
and symbols can be displayed.
To record planning metadata together with
recording clips, you need to load a planning
metadata file into the camcorder’s memory before
starting to shoot.
There are two ways to load files.
• Load a file that has been written to the following
directories on an SxS memory card.
• When a Wi-Fi connection is made between the
camcorder and a computer, operate the Web
menu built in the camcorder from the computer
to transfer a file.
For details on how to use the Web menu to load a
planning metadata file, refer to the Supplement
supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled “Manuals for
Solid-State Memory 3D Camcorder”).
To load a planning metadata file by menu
operation
Do the following procedures with OPERAION
>Planning Metadata in the setup menu.
1Insert an SxS memory card into the left
memory card slot A or B, and set Load/
Slot(A) or Load/Slot(B) to [Execute].
A file list appears.
Notes
• The right slots cannot be used to load planning
metadata from SxS memory cards.
• The file list displays up to 64 files.
Even if the total number of planning metadata
files is 64 or less, all of the planning metadata
files may not appear if the directory where they
are located on the SxS memory card (General/
Sony/Planning) contains 512 or more files.
2Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load and press the knob.
Planning Metadata
Operations
Loading a Planning Metadata File
into Camcorder’s Internal Memory
Media Directory to which files are
written
SxS memory
card
BPAV/General/Sony/Planning
SDHC PRIVATE/SONY/BPAV/General/
Sony/Planning
Planning Metadata Operations 85
Chapter 4 Shooting
To display detailed information in
planning metadata
After loading planning metadata into the
camcorder, you can check the detailed
information that it contains, such as file names,
date and time of creation, and titles.
1Under OPERATION >Plan.Metadata
>Properties in the setup menu, select
[Execute].
2Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
The PLANNING METADATA
PROPERTIES list appears.
The list contains the following information.
a) Material group: A group of clips recorded with
the same planning metadata.
You can turn the MENU knob to scroll the
list.
After turning the MENU knob to select an
item, you can press the SET button to display
the selected item only.
To clear the planning metadata loaded
1Under OPERATION >Plan.Metadata
>Clear in the setup menu, select
[Execute].
2Turn the MENU knob to select
[Execute], and then press the knob.
Deletion of the file starts.
The message “Clear Planning Metadata File
OK” appears when the deletion finishes.
The following two types of clip name strings can
be written in a planning metadata file.
• The ASCII format name that appears in the
viewfinder
• The UTF-8 format name that is actually
registered as the clip name
You can select which type of clip name is
displayed with OPERAION >Planning Metadata
>Clip Name Disp in the setup menu.
When a clip name is set with planning metadata,
the name is displayed under the depth of field
indication on the viewfinder screen.
Note
When you define both of ASCII format name and UTF-
8 format name with planning metadata, the UTF-8
format string is used as the clip name string. If you define
either of ASCII format name and UTF-8 format name
with planning metadata, the defined format name is
displayed though it is not selected by menu setting.
Clip name string example
Use a text editor to modify the two fields in the
<Title> tag that contain the clip name strings.
The shaded fields in the example are clip name
strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format
(up to 44 characters). “Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo”
is described in UTF-8 format (up to 44 bytes).
“sp” indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage
return.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>3
<PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
P0001"spcreationDate="
2011-08-20T17:00:00+09:00"sp
lastUpdate="
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp
version="1.00">3
<PropertiessppropertyId="
assignment"spupdate="
2011-09-20T10:30:00+09:00"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">3
Item Information
File Name File name
Assign ID Assign ID
Created Date and time of creation
Modified Date and time of most recent
modification
Modified by Name of person who
modified the file
Title Title1 specified in file (ASCII
format clip name)
Title2 Title2 specified in file (UTF-8
format clip name)
Material Gp Number of clips in material
group a)
Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9
Names defined in file for Shot
Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9
Defining Clip Names in Planning
Metadata
Planning Metadata Operations
86
Chapter 4 Shooting
<TitlespusAscii=" "sp
xml:lang="en">
</Title>3
</Properties>3
</PlanningMetadata>3
Notes
• When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line with a CRLF only after the last character in the
statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified.
• Up to 44 bytes (or characters) string is available for the
clip name.
If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, 44 bytes
string is used as the clip name.
If only ASCII format name is specified, 44 characters
string is used as the clip name.
When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF-8
format name string can be used, the standard format
clip name is used.
You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add-in
application software supplied with the CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter to define clip names. For details, refer
to the Operating Instructions supplied with the CBK-
WA01.
To set clip names
1Load a planning metadata file that
contains clip names into this
camcorder.
2Set OPERATION >Clip >Auto Naming
in the setup menu to [Plan].
Each time that you record a clip, the unit
automatically generates a name consisting of
the clip name defined in the planning
metadata file, with the addition of an
underbar (_) and a five-digit serial number
(00001 to 99999).
Examples:
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001,
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002, ...
Note
When you load another planning metadata file, the serial
number returns to 00001 with the next recording
operation.
To select the clip name display format
When names are defined in both ASCII format
and UTF-8 format, you can use OPERATION
>Clip >Clip Name Disp in the setup menu to
select which of the names to display on the
viewfinder screen.
To display ASCII format names: Select
Title1(ASCII).
The clip name becomes
“Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_SerialNumber”,
but “Typhoon_SerialNumber” is displayed
on the screens.
To display UTF-8 format names: Select
Title2(UTF-8).
The clip name becomes
“Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_SerialNumber”,
and the same name is displayed on the
screens.
When you use planning metadata to set shot
marks, you can define names for Shot Mark 0 to
Shot Mark 9.
When you record shot marks, you can add the
shot mark name strings defined in the planning
metadata.
Notes
• Shot marks are set for left slot clips only.
• Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on the
camcorder. Shot Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9 and Shot Mark
0 can be recorded by operation from a computer which
is connected with the camcorder via Wi-Fi.
Shot mark name string example
Use a text editor to modify the fields in the < Meta
name> tag.
The shaded fields in the example are essence
mark name strings. Names can be either in ASCII
format (up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up
to 16 characters).
“sp” indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage
return.
Note
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character,
the maximum length of that string is 16 characters.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>3
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
H00123"spcreationDate="
2011-04-15T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"spversion=
Typhoon
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo
Defining Shot Mark Names in
Planning Metadata
3D Shooting Guide Function 87
Chapter 4 Shooting
"1.00">3
<PropertiessppropertyId=
"assignment"spclass="original"sp
update="2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">3
<TitlespusAscii="Football
Game"spxml:lang="en">
Football Game 15/04/2011</
Title>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark3"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark4"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark5"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark6"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark7"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark8"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark9"sp
content=" "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark0"sp
content=" "/>3
</Properties>3
</PlanningMetadata>3
Note
When you create a definition file, enter each statement as
a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in
the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified, except within essence mark name strings.
You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add-in
application software supplied with the CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter to Essence mark names. For details,
refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the
CBK-WA01.
The camcorder provides the following functions
to help keep the left/right parallax within an
appropriate range when shooting in 3D.
• Displays the subject distance range in the
viewfinder that will keep the parallax in an
appropriate range and produce natural
stereoscopic images.
• Displays a colored outline of the subject in the
viewfinder as a warning that the parallax is too
large and stereoscopic imaging of the subject is
difficult (3D depth warning display).
• Displays a grid in the viewfinder.
For details about parallax, see page 13.
The distance range to the subject that will produce
natural, stereoscopic images is displayed in the
viewfinder.
When shooting, keep the subject within this
range.
When the parallax is too large because the subject
is too close or too far away, a colored outline
around the subject is displayed in the viewfinder.
A red outline is displayed when the subject is too
close, and a blue outline when the subject is too
far away.
When a 3D depth warning is displayed, you
should adjust the framing and convergence point
Goal
Shoot
Corner Kick
Free Kick
Goal Kick
Foul
PK
1st Half
2nd Half
Kick Off
3D Shooting Guide
Function
Displaying the Subject Distance
Range
Displaying 3D Depth Warning
3D Shooting Guide Function
88
Chapter 4 Shooting
so that the warning is not displayed for an
extended length of time.
To display the 3D depth warning, set
OPERATION >3D Guide >Depth Warning in the
setup menu to On.
The 3D depth warning display can be switched
On and Off during recording by setting an
assignable switch with the Depth Warning
function assignment to On.
Notes
• The warning may not be displayed correctly,
depending on the subject. Use this function as a guide
when shooting in 3D.
• The 3D depth warning can be displayed in the supplied
viewfinder only.
Setting the parallax reference
You can set the amount of parallax as a
percentage (%) of the screen width or the
maximum size of the screen as the reference for
calculating the appropriate subject distance using
the 3D shooting guide function.
To set the amount of parallax percentage
1Set OPERATION >3D Guide >Setting
in the setup menu to %.
2Set the maximum value of parallax for
close subjects in 3D Guide >Setting
>%(Near), and the maximum value of
parallax for distant subjects in 3D
Guide >Setting >%(Far).
You can set values between 1.0 and 10.0%.
To set the maximum screen size
1Set OPERATION >3D Guide >Setting
in the setup menu to Screen Size.
2Select the maximum screen size in 3D
Guide >Setting >Screen Size.
You can select 77, 100, or 200-inch type
screens.
You can display a grid when shooting in 3D to
easily check the left/right parallax.
The grid can be displayed in the viewfinder, on a
monitor connected to the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector, and on a monitor connected to the
HDMI connector.
To display the grid in the viewfinder, set
OPERATION >Grid >Grid(VF) in the setup
menu to On.
Similarly, you can also individually set whether
to display the grid on monitors connected to the
HD/SD SDI OUT (L/R) connector and the HDMI
connector.
The grid display can be switched On and Off
during recording by setting an assignable switch
with the Grid (VF) function assignment to On.
Notes
• The grid cannot be displayed when the viewfinder
display select switch is set to 3D.
• The grid cannot be displayed when using side-by-side
output on the HD/SD SDI OUT connector or HDMI
connector.
Blue outline
Red outline
Displaying the Grid
Clip Playback 89
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
A thumbnail screen appears if you press the
THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode.
Thumbnail screens display lists of the clips stored
on SxS memory cards in the form of index
pictures. (A message appears if you insert a
memory card that contains no clips.)
The thumbnail screen displays the content of
memory cards inserted in the left slots. (If the
THUMBNAIL button is pressed when memory
cards are inserted in right slots only, the all clips
thumbnail screen for the memory cards in the
right slots is displayed.)
You can select any clip (see page 91) in a
thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip
(see page 91).
In thumbnail screens, the timecode of the index
picture appears beneath the thumbnail for each
clip. (An OK mark also appears when a clip has
been marked with an OK mark.)
Note
Normal thumbnail screens only display clips in the
recording format configured in the camcorder (clips that
match all the Rec Format, HD System Line, System
Frequency, and Country settings under OPERATION
>Format in the setup menu (see page 104)).
If you want to display all recorded clips, switch to the all
clips thumbnail screen. However, it is not possible to
start playback from the all clips thumbnail screen (see
page 94).
Chapter5Clip Operations
Clip Playback
Thumbnail Screen
Clip Playback
90
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
aIndex picture
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is set
automatically as the index picture. You can
change to index picture to any frame (see
page 99).
bLock mark
Indicates the selected clip is marked with an OK
mark and protected.
cMedia status
Displays highlighted icons for the currently
selected SxS memory card.
If the card is write-protected, a lock mark appears
on the left.
This indicator displays the status of SxS memory
cards in the left slots. If there is no memory card
in either of the left slots (A or B), the indicator
displays the status of the memory cards in the
right slots.
dDate and start time of recording
eClip name
fIndependent AV file icon
This appears only when a clip is an independent
AV file. SxS memory cards may contain
independent files that have been added directly
from a computer. Because independent files lack
the associated management files, some operations
and information displays may not be available.
gVideo format of recording
hSpecial recording information
This displays the mode of clips that have been
recorded in a special mode (Slow & Quick
Motion, Interval Rec, Frame Rec).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rates
are displayed to the right as [Recording frame
rate/Playback frame rate] fps.
iOK mark
An OK mark appears only when the clip has been
marked with an OK mark (see page 96).
j3D/2D
When a 3D clip is selected, this displays “L” or
“R.” When a 2D clip is selected, this displays
“2D.”
kClip duration
lTimecode
This is the timecode of the index picture.
Clip number/Number of clips
Cursor (yellow)
Clip Playback 91
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
To switch between SxS memory cards
When memory cards are loaded in both slots A
and B, you can switch between them by pressing
the SLOT SELECT button.
Note
While an expand thumbnail screen (see page 98) or an
essence mark thumbnail screen (see page 98) is
displayed, SxS memory cards cannot be switched.
To hide the thumbnail screen
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
To select clip thumbnails
Do one of the following to move the yellow
cursor to the clip that you want to select.
• Press an arrow button (J, j, K, k).
• Turn the MENU knob.
• Press the PREV or NEXT button.
To select the first thumbnail
With the F REV button held down, press the
PREV button.
To select the last thumbnail
With the F FWD button held down, press the
NEXT button.
To play clips sequentially starting from a
selected clip
1Select the thumbnail of the clip that you
want to play first.
2Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Play begins from the top of the selected clip.
Play continues through all clips after the selected
clip.
Play continues even if there is mix of 3D clips and
2D clips. This function plays memory cards in the
left slots. Clips on memory cards in the right slots
are played only when a 3D clip exists on a
memory card in the left slots and there is a
corresponding clip in the right slots.
When the last clip has been played to the end, the
camcorder enters pause (still image) mode at the
last frame of the last clip.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the
thumbnail screen.
Notes
• There may be momentary picture breakup or still
image display at the transition from one clip to another.
During this time, the playback controls and the
THUMBNAIL button cannot be operated.
• When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and
begin playback, there may be momentary picture
breakup at the top of the clip. To view the top of the
clip without breakup, put the camcorder into playback
mode, pause, use the PREV button to return to the top
of the clip, and start playback again.
Playing 3D clips
Clips that were recorded by the camcorder in 3D
are played in 3D. Both of the left and right clips
that were recorded in 3D are required in order to
play in 3D. However, clips cannot be played in
3D if the clips are in slot A on the left side and in
slot B on the right side. Also, clips cannot be
played if they were recorded in left and right slots
and then inserted into the opposite slots for
playback.
When there is a 3D clip on a memory card in a left
slot and no corresponding clip in a right slot, the
clip is played in 2D. Clips that exist only in right
slots cannot be played.
Audio is played from left clips only.
Note
If the recording time of a clip in the left slot is longer than
the clip in the right slot, the clip in the left slot continues
to play when the clip in the right slot finishes. If the
recording time of the clip in the right slot is longer, the
playback of the clip in the right slot stops at the same
time the clip in the left slot finishes, and then playback of
the next clip in the left slot begins.
To pause playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while
playback is paused.
Press the button again to return to playback mode.
To play at high speed
Press the F FWD button (see page 26) or the
F REV button (see page 26).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
To stop playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops and the
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Playing Clips
Clip Playback
92
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops
and the thumbnail screen (see page 89)
appears in the viewfinder.
Playback also stops if you eject the memory card.
In this case, the camera picture appears in the
viewfinder.
To cue up clips
To return to the top of the current clip
Press the PREV button.
• During playback or F FWD, this jumps to the
top of the current clip and starts playback.
• During F REV or pause, this jumps to the top of
the current clip and displays a still image.
• Each subsequent press of the button moves to
the previous clip.
To play from the top of the first clip
Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV
buttons. This jumps to the top of the first clip on
the SxS memory card.
To jump to the top of the next clip
Press the NEXT button.
• During playback or F FWD, this jumps to the
top of the next clip and starts playback.
• During F REV or pause, this jumps to the top of
the next clip and displays a still image.
• Each subsequent press of the button moves to
the next clip.
To play from the top of the last clip
Simultaneously press the NEXT and F FWD
buttons. This jumps to the top of the last clip on
the SxS memory card.
To add a shot mark during play
You can add shot marks to clips during play by
using the same method used during recording (see
page 77).
Shot marks can be added to clips in left slots only.
Notes
• Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory
card is write protected.
• Shot marks cannot be added at the first frame of each
clip or last frame of the last clip.
You can switch a thumbnail screen to the
following thumbnail search screens, which allow
you quickly find the clips you want.
• Expand thumbnail screen
• Shot mark thumbnail screen
Like the normal thumbnail screen and the OK clip
thumbnail screen, these screens allow you to
select clip thumbnails (see page 91) and to start
clip playback (see page 91).
To search for scenes in clips with the
expand thumbnail screen
The expand thumbnail screen is convenient when
you want to find and cue up a specific scene in a
long clip.
To display the expand thumbnail screen, select a
clip in the thumbnail screen and press the
EXPAND button (see page 27) or select
THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >Forward
Expansion in the setup menu. The selected clip is
divided into 12 equally-sized blocks, and a
thumbnail of the first frame in each block is
displayed.
This helps you to quickly cue up to a desired
scene in a clip of long duration.
See “Displaying the Expand Thumbnail Screen”
(page 98) for more information about the expand
thumbnail screen.
To search for shot marks in clips with the
shot mark thumbnail screen
When a clip contains one or more shot marks, you
can easily find them with the shot mark thumbnail
screen. The shot mark thumbnail screen displays
a thumbnail of each shot mark frame in the clip.
To display the shot mark thumbnail screen, press
the ESSENCE MARK button (see page 28) or
select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View
>Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
See “Displaying the Shot Mark Thumbnail Screen”
(page 98) for more information about the shot mark
thumbnail screen.
Using Thumbnails to Search
Inside Clips
Thumbnail Operations 93
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to perform various operations on clips, to check clip properties, and
to change clip metadata.
Thumbnail Operations
THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration
Menu items Sub-items Description
Clip Properties — Displays detailed properties (see page 95).
Set Index Picture — Changes index pictures in the expand thumbnail screen or
the shot mark thumbnail screen (see page 99).
Thumbnail View Forward Expansion • Displays the expand thumbnail screen (see page 98).
• In the expand thumbnail screen, increases the number of
divisions (see page 98).
Back Expansion In the expand thumbnail screen, decreases the number of
divisions.
Essence Mark Thumbnail Displays the shot mark thumbnail screen (see page 98).
Clip Thumbnail Displays the normal thumbnail screen.
All Clip Thumbnail- L Displays the all clip thumbnails screen for media in left
slots (see page 94).
All Clip Thumbnail- R Displays the all clip thumbnails screen for media in right
slots (see page 94).
Set Shot Mark Add Shot Mark1 In the expand thumbnail screen or the shot mark thumbnail
screen, adds a Shot Mark1 mark (see page 99).
Delete Shot Mark1 In the expand thumbnail screen or the shot mark thumbnail
screen, deletes a Shot Mark1 mark (see page 99).
Add Shot Mark2 In the expand thumbnail screen or the shot mark thumbnail
screen, adds a Shot Mark2 mark (see page 99).
Delete Shot Mark2 In the expand thumbnail screen or the shot mark thumbnail
screen, deletes a Shot Mark2 mark (see page 99).
Add OK Mark — Adds an OK mark and protects a clip (see page 96).
Delete OK Mark — Deletes an OK mark and unprotects a clip (see page 96).
Copy Clip — Copies a clip (see page 96).
Delete Clip — Deletes a clip (see page 97).
Filter Clips — Displays the OK clip thumbnail screen (see page 94).
Copy All All Clips Batch copies groups of clips/files (see page 96).
General Files
All Clips & General Files
Delete All Clips Left Deletes all unprotected clips from media in left slots (see
page 97).
Left & Right Deletes all unprotected clips from media in left and right
slots (see page 97).
Thumbnail Operations
94
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 101) for
information about menu operations.
To display the THUMBNAIL menu
1Press the THUMBNAIL button to
display the thumbnail screen.
2Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON,
or press the MENU button.
3Turn the MENU knob to select “TH”,
and then press the knob. Or press the J
or j button to select “TH”, and then
press the SET button.
The THUMBNAIL menu appears.
To hide the THUMBNAIL menu, press the
MENU button again.
To select menu items and sub-items
Do one of the following.
• Turn the MENU knob to select an item or sub-
item, and then press the knob.
• Press the arrow buttons (J, j, K, k) to
select an item or sub-item, and then press the
SET button.
According to the selected item or sub-item, a
selection list or a clip properties screen appears
(see page 95).
To return to the previous state, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the
ESCAPE side.
Notes
• When an SxS memory card is write protected, it is not
possible to copy or delete clips, to change index
pictures, or to add and delete OK marks and shot
marks.
• Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state
of the camcorder when the menu was displayed.
To hide the clip properties screen
Do one of the following.
Press the RESET/RETURN button: This
returns to the THUMBNAIL menu.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: The
camcorder enters E-E mode, and the camera
picture appears.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Playback from
the selected clip starts.
To display OK clip thumbnails
From among all clips stored on the currently
selected SxS memory card, the OK clip thumbnail
screen displays only clips which have been
marked with an OK mark.
When the normal thumbnail screen is displayed,
you can select THUMBNAIL >Filter Clips to
switch to the OK clip thumbnail screen.
See “Adding and Deleting OK Marks” (page 96) for
information about how to add OK marks.
To display the all clips thumbnail screen
The all clips thumbnail screen displays
thumbnails of all of the clips on the selected
memory card, regardless of the recording format.
This is useful when you want to check whether
the memory card contains clips in another mode.
The all clips thumbnail screen can also display
clips on SxS memory cards inserted in right slots.
When normal thumbnail screens are displayed,
you can switch to the all clips thumbnail screen
by selecting THUMBNAIL >All Clip
Thumbnail-L (left slots) or All Clip Thumbnail-R
(right slots) in the setup menu.
When the all clips thumbnail screen for left clips
is displayed, pressing the RESET/RETURN
button returns you to the normal thumbnail
screen. When the all clips thumbnail screen for
right clips is displayed, pressing the RESET/
RETURN button returns you to E-E mode.
Note
You cannot start playback from the all clips thumbnail
screen.
Basic THUMBNAIL Menu
Operations
Changing the Thumbnail Screen
Type
Thumbnail Operations 95
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
The clip properties screen appears when you select Clip Properties in the THUMBNAIL menu.
aImage of the current clip
bImage of the previous clip
Press the PREV button to display the properties of
the previous clip.
cImage of the next clip
Press the NEXT button to display the properties
of the next clip.
dClip name
The number of component clips appears after the
clip name.
When clip names are 12 characters or longer, only
the first five characters and the last five characters
are displayed. If you want to check the
abbreviated characters, press the MENU knob to
switch to long display mode. In long display
mode, up to 53 characters are displayed in clip
names.
Press the MENU knob again to exit long display
mode. Pressing the PREV or NEXT button to
display the previous or next clip also exists long
display mode.
eLock mark
This appears when the clip is marked with an OK
mark and protected.
fOK mark
This appears only when an OK mark has been
added.
gDate and start time of recording
h3D/2D
When a 3D clip is selected, this displays “Left” or
“Right.” When a 2D clip is selected, this displays
“2D.”
iSpecial recording information
This displays the mode of clips that have been
recorded in a special mode (Slow & Quick
Motion, Interval Rec, Frame Rec).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rates
are displayed to the right as [Recording frame
rate/Playback frame rate].
jTimecode of the displayed image
kTimecode of the recording start point
lTimecode of the recording end point
mDuration
nRecorded audio channels
oVideo format of recording
Displaying Clip Properties
Thumbnail Operations
96
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
You can add OK marks to clips. This makes it
possible to display thumbnails of only the clips
that you need by pressing the THUMBNAIL
button.
Clips with OK marks cannot be deleted. If you
want to delete such a clip, delete the OK mark
first.
Note
OK marks are added to and deleted from clips on
memory cards inserted in left slots. However, if a clip is
a 3D clip and has a corresponding clip in a right slot, OK
marks are also added to and deleted from the clip in the
right slot.
To add an OK mark
1In the thumbnail screen, select
THUMBNAIL >Add OK Mark.
The screen changes to the clip properties
screen, and a confirmation message appears
beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
An OK mark is added to the selected clip.
To delete an OK mark
A Delete OK Mark item appears in the
THUMBNAIL menu when you have selected a
clip that has an OK mark.
1In the thumbnail screen, select
THUMBNAIL >Delete OK Mark.
The screen changes to the clip properties
screen, and a confirmation message appears
beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The OK mark is deleted from the selected clip.
You can copy clips to other SxS memory cards.
Clips are copied to destination SxS memory cards
using the same names as the original clips.
When copying 3D clips, both the left and right
clips are simultaneously copied. Insert SxS
memory cards in both left and right slots for the
copy source and copy destination.
When copying 2D clips, the clips in the left slots
are copied.
Notes
• If a clip with the same name already exists at the copy
destination SxS memory card, a one-digit number in
parentheses is added to the original name.
The number in parentheses is the smallest number that
does not exist at the copy destination.
Examples:
ABCD0002tABCD0002(1)
ABCD0002(1)tABCD0002(2)
ABCD0005(3)tABCD0005(4)
• If the parenthetical numbers (1) to (9) already exist at
the copy destination, it is not possible to copy any more
clips under that name. (A tenth clip cannot be copied.)
• A message appears if there is not enough free capacity
at the copy destination SxS memory card. Exchange
the card for one with more free capacity.
• When multiple clips are recorded in a source SxS
memory card, it may not be possible to copy all clips
to the end. Depending on memory characteristics and
usage of the memory cards, this can occur even when
the source and destination memory cards have the
same capacity.
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip to copy, and then
select THUMBNAIL >Copy Clip.
The screen changes to the properties screen
of that clip, and a confirmation message
appears beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The copy starts.
During the copy, an execution message and
progress bar are displayed.
When the copy finishes, the display returns to the
thumbnail screen.
To cancel a copy operation
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
The copy is cancelled, and the display returns to
the thumbnail screen.
To batch copy groups of clips/files
You can batch copy groups of clips from one SxS
memory card to another SxS memory card.
Adding and Deleting OK Marks
Copying Clips
Thumbnail Operations 97
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
The batch copy function copies all clips (clips
matching the recording format configured for the
camcorder) displayed in the thumbnail screen.
Clips not displayed in the thumbnail screen are
not copied.
If the batch copy target includes 3D clips, the
corresponding right clips on media in right slots
are simultaneously copied.
You can also copy of the files in the General
directory, either together with or separately from
clips.
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnails of the clips to copy and then
select THUMBNAIL >Copy All >All
Clips.
The confirmation message “Copy All Clip?”
appears.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The copy starts.
During the copy, the progress of the copy is
displayed.
To cancel the copy operation
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
When the copy finishes
A completion message appears, and the
THUMBNAIL menu screen appears again.
To copy all files in the General directory
To copy all files only, without copying clips,
select THUMBNAIL >Copy All >General Files
in step 1.
To copy all files together with all clips, select
THUMBNAIL >Copy All >All Clips & General
Files in step 1.
You can delete clips from SxS memory cards.
When deleting 3D clips, both the left and right
clips are deleted if the corresponding clips in the
left and right slots are both present.
Note
Clips with OK marks cannot be deleted.
If you want to delete such clips, first delete the OK marks
(see page 96).
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip to delete, and then
select THUMBNAIL >Delete Clip.
The screen changes to the properties screen
of that clip, and a confirmation message
appears beneath the index picture.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The clip is deleted.
In the thumbnail screen, the clips that followed
the deleted clip move up one position.
To batch delete groups of clips
You can batch delete groups of clips from an SxS
memory card.
Notes
• The batch delete function deletes only clips (clips
matching the recording format configured for the
camcorder) displayed in the thumbnail screen. Clips
not displayed in the thumbnail screen are not deleted.
• In HD mode, clips with OK marks are not deleted,
even when a deletion is executed for a group of clips
that includes them.
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnails of the clips to delete and
then select THUMBNAIL >Delete All
Clips.
2Select Left to delete clips on SxS
memory cards in left slots, or select Left
& Right to delete clips on SxS memory
cards in left and right slots.
The confirmation message “Delete All
Clips?” appears.
3Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
The deletion starts.
During the deletion, the progress of the
deletion is displayed.
To cancel the deletion
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
When the deletion finishes
A completion message appears, and the
THUMBNAIL menu screen appears again.
Deleting Clips
Thumbnail Operations
98
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
The expand thumbnail screen allows you to
search inside clips by using thumbnails (see
page 92), to change index pictures (see page 99),
and to add and delete shot marks (see page 99).
To display the screen
In the thumbnail screen, select a thumbnail and
press the EXPAND button (see page 27) or select
THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >Forward
Expansion.
The selected clip is divided into 12 equally-sized
blocks, and the first frame in each block is
displayed in a list of thumbnails.
Clip properties are shown at the bottom of the
screen.
Except for the items listed below, the information
displayed here is the same as the information
displayed in the normal thumbnail screen.
aFrame information
This displays frame information using icons.
The same icons are also displayed beneath the
thumbnails. However, when several icons could
be displayed for the same frame, one icon is
selected for display, in the order of priority Index
picture >Shot Mark1 >Shot Mark2.
bTimecode
This displays the timecode of the selected frame
in the expand thumbnail screen.
To increase the number of divisions
When you press the EXPAND button, or select
THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail View >Forward
Expansion, the divided clip or file is further
divided into 12 equally-sized blocks (a clip or file
that has been divided into 12 is further divided
into 12, for 12 × 12 = 144 divisions). You can
repeat the same operation to increase the number
of division.
To return to the previous division level
Press the EXPAND button with the SHIFT button
held down, or select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail
View >Back Expansion. The expand thumbnail
screen returns to the previous division level.
In the shot mark thumbnail screen, you can search
for shot marks in clips (see page 92), change
index pictures (see page 99), and add and delete
shot marks (see page 99).
Only left slot memory cards can be displayed on
the shot mark thumbnail screen. The shot mark
thumbnail screen is not displayed for right slot
memory cards.
1In the thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of a clip, and press the
ESSENCE MARK button (see page 28)
or select THUMBNAIL >Thumbnail
View >Essence Mark Thumbnail.
The shot mark thumbnail screen appears, and
a selection list is displayed.
2Select the type of the essence mark
thumbnail screen.
All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked
with essence marks.
Shot Mark1: Display only frames marked
with Shot Mark1 marks.
Shot Mark2: Display only frames marked
with Shot Mark2 marks.
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot
Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9.
Displaying the Expand Thumbnail
Screen
Index picture
Frame with Shot Mark1
Frame with Shot Mark2
S1 S2
S2 S1
Number of the selected frame
S1
S2
Displaying the Shot Mark
Thumbnail Screen
Thumbnail Operations 99
Chapter 5 Clip Operations
If you have recorded clips by using planning
metadata that defined names for Shot Mark 0
to Shot Mark 9, the defined names are
displayed instead of the above item names in
the list.
Example shot mark thumbnail screen
(with Shot Mark1 selected)
The properties of the clip appear at the bottom of
the screen.
Except for the following item, the information
displayed here is the same as the information
displayed in the expand thumbnail screen.
aTimecode
This is the timecode of the selected frame in the
shot mark thumbnail screen.
In the shot mark thumbnail screen (see page 98)
or the expand thumbnail screen (see page 98),
you can add shot marks to any frame of clips, and
delete recorded shot marks.
To add shot marks
1Select the frame where you want to add
a shot mark, and then select
THUMBNAIL >Set Shot Mark >Add
Shot Mark1 (or Add Shot Mark2).
The properties screen of the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message appears
below the image.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
To delete shot marks
1Select the frame where you want to
delete a shot mark, and then select
THUMBNAIL >Set Shot Mark >Delete
Shot Mark1 (or Delete Shot Mark2).
The properties screen of the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message appears
below the image.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
In the shot mark thumbnail screen (see page 98)
or the expand thumbnail screen (see page 98),
you can set the selected frame as the clip index
picture.
The clip index picture can be changed only for
clips on memory cards inserted in left slots.
1Select the thumbnail of the frame that
you want to use as the index picture,
and then select THUMBNAIL >Set
Index Picture.
The properties screen of the selected frame
appears, and a confirmation message appears
below the image.
2Select [Execute], and press the MENU
knob.
Note
Even if you set the index picture to a frame that is not the
first frame of a clip, playback of that clip from a
thumbnail screen always begins at the first frame.
Adding and Deleting Shot Marks
S1 S2 S2 S1
S1 S1 Changing Clip Index Pictures
Setup Menu Organization and Levels
100
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
On this camcorder, settings for shooting and
playback are made in the setup menu, which
appears in the viewfinder.
The setup menu can also be displayed on an
external video monitor (see page 151).
The setup menu consists of the following menus.
Op: OPERATION menu
Settings related to shooting, except settings
related to picture quality (see page 104)
Pa: PAINT menu
Settings related to picture quality (see page 122)
Th: THUMBNAIL menu
Settings related to clip thumbnails (see page 93)
Note
The THUMBNAIL menu is used only when a thumbnail
screen (see page 89) is displayed. It is disabled when no
thumbnail screen is displayed.
Ma: MAINTENANCE menu
Settings related to audio and timecode (see
page 127)
Fi: FILE menu
Settings related to file operations (see page 140)
See “THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration” (page 93)
for the organization of the THUMBNAIL menu.
OPERATION Menu (see page 104)
Chapter6
Menu and Detailed Settings
Setup Menu
Organization and Levels
Setup Menu Organization
Setup Menu Levels
OPERATION
Format
Format Media
Output
Super Impose
Rec Function
Assignable SW
Lens Dial
Dial Operation
Enable VF Disp
Grid
3D Guide
VF Setting
Marker
Gain Switch
TLCS
Zebra
Display On/Off
Auto Conv.
Lens Adjust(R)
Auto Iris
White Setting
Offset White
Shutter Select
Time Zone
Clip
Plan.Metadata
Basic Setup Menu Operations 101
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
PAINT Menu (see page 122)
MAINTENANCE Menu (see page 127)
FILE Menu (see page 140)
To display the setup menu
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press
the MENU button.
The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu
list appears on the screen.
A cursor appears over the first two characters of the
most recently used menu, and the corresponding
menu item selection area appears to the right.
Example: When the cursor is positioned at the
OPERATION menu
Note
The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in
focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification
mode by pressing the assignable switch to which the
Focus Mag function has been assigned.
To make menu settings
1Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to move the cursor to the item
that you want to set.
A list of selectable menu items appears in the
menu item selection area to the right of the
icon.
2Press the MENU knob or the SET
button.
The cursor moves to the menu item selection
area.
You can also move the cursor to the menu
item selection area by pressing the k
button.
PAINT
Switch Status
White
Black
Flare
Gamma
Black Gamma
Knee
White Clip
Detail
Aperture
Skin Detail
Matrix
Multi Matrix
Low Key Saturation
MAINTENANCE
White Shading
Battery
Audio
WRR Setting
Timecode
Essence Mark
Camera Config
Preset White
White Filter
Auto Iris2
Flicker Reduce
Genlock
ND Comp
Lens
Network Setting
Wi-Fi Setting
Clock set
Language
Hours Meter
Versio n
FILE
All
Scene
Reference
Basic Setup Menu
Operations
Menu item selection area
Menu list
Basic Setup Menu Operations
102
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
• The menu item selection area displays a
maximum of seven lines. You can scroll
through menus with more than seven lines
by moving the cursor up and down.
Triangles appear at the upper right and
lower right of the menu item selection area
to indicate that a menu is scrollable.
3Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to move the cursor to the item
that you want to set, and then confirm
by pressing the MENU knob or the SET
button.
The sub-items area appears to the right of the
menu item selection area, and the cursor
moves to the first sub-item.
4Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to move the cursor to the sub-
item that you want to set, and then
confirm the selection by pressing the
MENU knob or the SET button.
The settings of the selected sub-item appear,
and the cursor moves to the currently
selected value.
• The settings area displays a maximum of
seven lines. You can scroll through menus
with more than seven sub-items by moving
the cursor up and down. Triangles appear at
the upper right and lower right of the
settings area to indicate that a sub-item
menu is scrollable.
• For sub-items with a large settings range
(for example, –99 to +99), the settings area
is not displayed. Instead, the sub-item name
is highlighted to indicate that the sub-item
can be set.
5Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to select the value to set, and
then confirm by pressing the MENU
knob or the SET button.
The setting is changed, and the display is
updated to show the new setting.
If you select [Execute] for an executable
item, the corresponding function is executed.
Items that require confirmation before execution
In step 3, the menu disappears and a confirmation
message appears if you select an item that
requires confirmation before execution. Follow
the instructions in the message to execute or
cancel the operation.
To enter text
Some items, such as time data or file names, must
be set by entering text. When you select one of
these items, the text entry area is highlighted, with
“SET” displayed to the right.
Appears when more menu items
are available below the last line.
(vappears when more menu items
are available above the first line.)
Menu item selection area
•B appears to the right when more detailed
sub-items are available.
•Settings appear to the right when a menu
item has no sub-items.
•You can select to return to the
previous level.
Sub-items area
• Displays sub-items and their current
settings
• To return to the previous level, select ,
press the K button, or push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to
the ESCAPE side.
Settings area
Basic Setup Menu Operations 103
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
1Turn the MENU knob, or press the J or
j button, to select a character, and then
confirm by pressing the MENU knob or
the SET button.
The cursor moves to the next position.
To return to the previous position, push the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
down to the ESCAPE side.
2Select characters for all positions up to
the last.
The cursor moves to “SET”.
3Press the MENU knob or the SET
button.
This confirms the setting.
To cancel the setting change
Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch down to the ESCAPE side.
To reset a setting to the initial value
1Before a setting is changed or after a
setting change is cancelled, push the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch up to the CANCEL/PRST side.
2When the message to confirm whether
the current setting is reset to the initial
value, push the MENU CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the
CANCEL/PRST side again.
The current setting is reset to the initial value.
To exit the menu
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or press
the MENU button.
The normal camera picture reappears.
Menu List
104
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Settings in bold are the factory default values.
Menu List
OPERATION Menu
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Format
Specifies the
camcorder’s operating
mode and recording
format.
3D/2D 3D/2D Selects 3D or 2D recording.
3D Single Rec Enable/Disable When recording in 3D, selects
whether to enable or disable
continuous recording to the SxS
memory card in the other slot when
the first card can no longer be
recorded to.
HD System Line 1080/720 Sets the number of system lines to
1080 or 720 (execute by selecting
Execute).
System Frequency The available settings
vary depending on the
settings in HD System
Line, and Country.
Selects the system frequency
(execute by selecting Execute).
59.94i/29.97P/23.98P When the HD System Line setting is
[1080], and the Country setting is
other than [PAL Area].
59.94P/29.97P/23.98P When the HD System Line setting is
[720], and the Country setting is
other than [PAL Area].
50i/25P When the HD System Line setting is
[1080], and the Country setting is
[PAL Area].
50P/25P When the HD System Line setting is
[720], and the Country setting is
[PAL Area].
Menu List 105
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Format
Specifies the
camcorder’s operating
mode and recording
format.
Rec Format The available settings
vary depending on the
settings in HD System
Line, and System
Frequency.
Selects the recording format
(execute by selecting Execute).
HQ 1920/HQ 1440 When the HD System Line setting is
[1080] and the System Frequency
setting is [29.97P], [23.98P] or
[25P].
HQ 1920/HQ 1440/
SP 1440
When the HD System Line setting is
[1080] and the System Frequency
setting is [59.94i] or [50i].
HQ 1280 When the HD System Line setting is
[720].
Country NTSC Area/NTSC(J)
Area/PAL Area
Selects the area of use (execute by
selecting Execute).
Format Media
Executes a media
format.
Media(A)-Left Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in
slot A on the left side (execute by
selecting Execute).
Media(A)-Right Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in
slot A on the right side (execute by
selecting Execute).
Media(A)-L&R Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory cards in
slot A on both the left and right sides
(execute by selecting Execute).
Media(B)-Left Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in
slot B on the left side (execute by
selecting Execute).
Media(B)-Right Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in
slot B on the right side (execute by
selecting Execute).
Media(B)-L&R Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory cards in
slot B on both the left and right sides
(execute by selecting Execute).
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
106
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Output
Makes settings related
to output signals.
Signal Format HD/SD/480P (576P) Selects the signals output from the
video connectors.
About 480P (576P), 480P can be
selected when the Country setting is
other than [PAL Area], and 576P can
be selected when the Country setting
is [PAL Area].
23.98P Output SDI(PsF)/HDMI(P)/Pull
Down
Selects the output format when the
video format is HQ1920/23.98P or
HQ1440/23.98P.
SDI(PsF): Progressive output from
the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector.
HDMI(P): Pure P output from the
HDMI connector.
Pull Down: Pulldown output from
the HD/SD SDI OUT and
HDMI connectors.
SDI Output(L) On/Off Turns on or off the output of signals
from the HD/SD SDI OUT(L)
connector.
SDI Signal(L) 3G/L/L+R/L-R/Side By
Side/Anaglyph
Selects the output format from the
HD/SD SDI OUT(L) connector
when the Signal Format setting is
HD.
3G: 3G SDI left and right signal
output.
L: 1.5G SDI left signal output.
L+R: 1.5G SDI L+R format signal
output.
L-R: 1.5G SDI L-R format signal
output.
Side By Side: 1.5G SDI side-by-
side format signal output.
Anaglyph: 1.5G SDI anaglyph
output.
SDI Output(R) On/Off Turns on or off the output of signals
from the HD/SD SDI OUT(R)
connector.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 107
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Output
Makes settings related
to output signals.
SDI Signal(R) R/L/L+R/L-R/Side By
Side/Anaglyph
Selects the output format from the
HD/SD SDI OUT(R) connector
when the Signal Format setting is
HD and the SDI Signal(L) setting is
3G.
R: 1.5G SDI right signal output.
L: 1.5G SDI left signal output.
L+R: 1.5G SDI L+R format signal
output.
L-R: 1.5G SDI L-R format signal
output.
Side By Side: 1.5G SDI side-by-
side format signal output.
Anaglyph: 1.5G SDI anaglyph
output.
HDMI Output On/Off Turns on or off the output of signals
from the HDMI connector.
HDMI Signal Side By Side/L/R/L+R/
L-R/Anaglyph
Selects the output format from the
HDMI connector when the Signal
Format setting is HD.
Side By Side: In 3D mode, side-by-
side format signal output. In 2D
mode, left signal output.
L: Left signal output
R: Right signal output
L+R: In 3D mode, L+R format
signal output. In 2D mode, left
signal output.
L-R: In 3D mode, L-R format signal
output. In 2D mode, left signal
output.
Anaglyph: Anaglyph output.
SDI/HDMI Out
Super
On/Off Turns on or off the superimposition
of text information on the output of
the HD/SD SDI OUT and HDMI
connectors.
Note
Text information is displayed correctly
only when SDI Signal (L), SDI Signal
(R), and HDMI Signal is set to “L”.
Video Out Super On/Off Turns on or off the superimposition
of text information on the output of
the VIDEO OUT connector.
Note
This setting cannot be selected when
the Signal Format setting is 480P or
576P, or when the System Frequency
setting is 23.98P, the Rec Format
setting is HQ1920 or HQ1440, and the
23.98P Output setting is HDMI(P).
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
108
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Output
Makes settings related
to output signals.
Down Converter Crop/Letter/Squeeze Selects the signal conversion mode
for output of SD signals.
Crop: Crop the edges of the 16:9
picture and output as a 4:3
picture.
Letter: Mask the top and bottom of
the 4:3 picture and display in
the center of the screen as a
16:9 picture.
Squeeze: Squeeze the 16:9 picture
horizontally and output as a 4:3
picture.
Wide ID Through/Auto Selects whether to add a wide ID
signal to the SD output signal.
Through: Output without adding a
wide ID signal.
Auto: Add and output a wide ID
signal when the Down
Converter setting is Squeeze.
Super Impose
Makes settings related
to superimposed text
and markers.
Super(VF Display) On/Off When the setting of Output >SDI/
HDMI Out Super or Video Out
Super is On, superimpose text
information on the output from the
HD/SD SDI OUT connector, HDMI
connector, and VIDEO OUT
connector, as specified (On or Off)
for each item.
Super(Menu) On/Off
Super(Timecode) On/Off
Super(Marker) On/Off When the setting of Output >Video
Out Super is On, specifies whether
to superimpose markers on the
output from the VIDEO OUT
connector.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 109
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Rec Function
Makes settings related
to special recording
modes.
Note
When Picture Cache is
assigned to an
assignable switch, this
item is disabled
(displayed in grey).
Slow & Quick On/Off Turns the Slow & Quick Motion
function on or off. (When this is set
to On, the Picture Cache Rec,
Interval Rec, and Frame Rec sub-
items are set to Off.)
Frame Rate The available settings
vary depending on the
Format >3D/2D and
Format >HD System Line
settings.
When the Slow & Quick setting is
On, sets the frame rate for Slow &
Quick Motion shooting.
When Format >Country
is set to other than [PAL
Area]: 17 to 30
When Format >Country
is set to [PAL Area]: 17 to
25 to 30
When the 3D/2D setting is 3D and
the HD System Line setting is 1080.
When Format >Country
is set to other than [PAL
Area]: 17 to 30 to 60
When Format >Country
is set to [PAL Area]: 17 to
25 to 60
When the 3D/2D setting is 3D and
the HD System Line setting is 720.
When Format >Country
is set to other than [PAL
Area]: 1 to 30
When Format >Country
is set to [PAL Area]: 1 to
25 to 30
When the 3D/2D setting is 2D and
the HD System Line setting is 1080.
When Format >Country
is set to other than [PAL
Area]: 1 to 30 to 60
When Format >Country
is set to [PAL Area]: 1 to
25 to 60
When the 3D/2D setting is 2D and
the HD System Line setting is 720.
Picture Cache Rec On/Off In 3D mode, turns the picture cache
function on or off. (When this is set
to On, the Slow & Quick, Interval
Rec, Frame Rec sub-items are set to
Off.)
P. Cache Rec Time 0-2sec/2-4sec/4-6sec/
6-8sec/8-10sec/10-12sec/
12-14sec/13-15sec
When the Picture Cache Rec setting
is On, set the picture cache time.
Interval Rec On/Off Turns the Interval Rec function on or
off. (When this is set to On, the Slow
& Quick, Picture Cache Rec, and
Frame Rec sub-items are set to Off.)
Frame Rec On/Off Turns the Frame Rec function on or
off. (When this is set to On, the Slow
& Quick, Picture Cache Rec, and
Interval Rec sub-items are set to
Off.)
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
110
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Rec Function
Makes settings related
to special recording
modes.
Note
When Picture Cache is
assigned to an
assignable switch, this
item is disabled
(displayed in grey).
Number of Frames The available settings
vary depending on the
settings in Format >HD
System Line and Format
>System Frequency.
When Interval Rec or Frame Rec is
set to On, specifies the number of
frames to shoot in one Interval Rec
or Frame Rec take.
2frame/6frame/12frame When the HD System Line setting is
720, and the System Frequency
setting is 59.94P or 50P.
1frame/3frame/6frame/
9frame
When the HD System Line setting is
other than 720, or the System
Frequency setting is other than
59.94P or 50P.
Interval Time 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/
20/30/40/50 (sec)
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/
20/30/40/50 (min) 1/2/3/
4/6/12/24 (hour)
When the Interval Rec setting is On,
sets the interval for Interval Rec
shooting.
Pre-Lighting Off/2sec/5sec/10sec If you want the video light to be
turned on before Interval Rec
shooting, select a number of seconds
before the start of shooting. If you
do not want it to be turned on, select
Off.
Assignable SW
Assigns functions to
assignable switches.
See “Assigning
Functions to Assignable
Switches” (page 142)
for more information
about assigning
functions.
<0> See page 142. Assigns function to ASSIGN. 0
switch.
<1> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 1
switch.
<2> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 2
switch.
<3> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 3
switch.
<4> Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE
4 switch.
<5> Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE
5 switch.
<6> Assigns function to ASSIGN. 6
switch.
RET Assigns function to RET button.
C. Temp Assigns function to COLOR TEMP.
button.
Zoom Speed 0 to 20 to 99 When Zoom has been assigned to
the ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch,
specifies the zoom speed.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 111
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Lens Dial
Makes settings related
to the lens dials.
Outer Zoom/Focus/
Convergence/Iris/Assign
Nothing
Assigns function to ZOOM dial.
Mid Zoom/Focus/
Convergence/Iris/Assign
Nothing
Assigns function to FOCUS dial.
Inner Zoom/Focus/
Convergence/Iris/Assign
Nothing
Assigns function to
CONVERGENCE dial.
Dial Operation
Makes settings related
to the rotation of the
lens dials.
Focus Clockwise Near/Far Sets the operation of the FOCUS
dial when turned clockwise.
Near: Shifts focus closer.
Far: Shifts focus further away.
Zoom Clockwise Tele /Wide Sets the operation of the ZOOM dial
when turned clockwise.
Tele : Telephoto
Wide: Wide angle
Conv. Clockwise Near/Far Sets the operation of the
CONVERGENCE dial when turned
clockwise.
Near: Shifts convergence closer.
Far: Shifts convergence further
away.
Iris Clockwise Open/Close Sets the operation of the IRIS dial
when turned clockwise.
Open: Opens the iris aperture.
Close: Closes the iris aperture.
Enable VF Disp
Makes settings related
to the display formats
selectable in the
viewfinder.
Right Enable/Disable Enables/disables selection of Right-
signal image display.
L+R Enable/Disable Enables/disables selection of L+R
display.
L-R Enable/Disable Enables/disables selection of L-R
display.
3D Enable/Disable Enables/disables selection of 3D
display.
Anaglyph Enable/Disable Enables/disables selection of
anaglyph display.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
112
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Grid
Makes settings related
to the grid display.
Grid(VF) On/Off Turns on or off the grid display in
the viewfinder.
Grid(SDI(L)) On/Off Turns on or off the grid display from
the HD/SD SDI OUT(L) connector.
Grid(SDI(R)) On/Off Turns on or off the grid display from
the HD/SD SDI OUT(R) connector.
Grid(HDMI) On/Off Turns on or off the grid display from
the HDMI connector.
Width Select %/Pixels Selects the method of specifying of
grid intervals.
%: Percentage of screen width.
Pixels: Number of pixels.
%0.5% to 3.0% to 10.0%
(0.1% steps)
Sets the grid interval as a
percentage.
Pixels The available settings
vary depending on the
Format >HD System Line
setting.
Sets the grid interval as number of
pixels.
10 to 60 to 192 When the HD System Line setting is
1080.
10 to 40 to 128 When the HD System Line setting is
720.
Line Thickness Thin/Normal/Thick Sets the thickness of the grid lines.
3D Guide
Makes settings related
to the 3D shooting
guide function.
Setting Screen Size/% Selects the reference for calculating
the appropriate distance to the
subject to control parallax.
Screen Size: Sets the viewing
monitor maximum size as the
reference.
%: Sets the amaunt of parallax as a
percentage of the screen width
as the reference.
Screen Size 77inch/100inch/200inch When Screen Size is selected in
Setting, selects the maximum size of
the viewing monitor.
%(Near) 1.0% to 3.0% to 10.0%
(0.1% steps)
When % is selected in Setting, sets
the maximum divergence in the near
field.
%(Far) 1.0% to 3.0% to 10.0%
(0.1% steps)
When % is selected in Setting, sets
the maximum divergence in the far
field.
Depth Warning On/Off Turns on or off the display of the 3D
depth warning in the viewfinder.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 113
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
VF Setting
Makes settings related
to the viewfinder
screen.
Color –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the density of the colors
displayed in the viewfinder screen.
Mode Color/B&W Selects Color or B&W as the display
mode of the viewfinder screen.
(Even when B&W is selected, some
indications are always displayed in
color. Examples include tally
indications, thumbnails, and the skin
gate area.)
Peaking Type Normal/Color/Both Selects the peaking type.
Normal: Normal peaking
Color: Color peaking
Both: Both
Peaking Frequency Normal/High Selects Normal or High as the
peaking frequency.
Peaking Color White/Red/Yellow/Blue When the Peaking Type setting is
Color, selects the peaking color from
among White, Red, Yellow, and
Blue.
Peaking Level Low/Mid/High When the Peaking Type setting is
Both, selects the color peaking level
from among Low, Mid, and High.
DXF Rec Tally Upper/Both When a separately sold viewfinder is
installed, specified whether to light
the tally indicator on the upper side
only (Upper), or on both the upper
and lower sides (Both).
Marker
Makes settings related
to marker display in the
viewfinder screen.
Setting On/Off Turns all markers on or off.
Note
When Marker is assigned to the
ASSIGN. 2 switch, this setting is
disabled.
Center Marker 1/2/3/4/Off When the center marker is
displayed, selects the type. Select
Off if you do not want to display the
marker.
Note
When Safety Zone, User Box, and
Guide Frame are set to [On], this
setting cannot be turned on.
Center H Position –40 to 0 to 40 Specifies the horizontal position of
the center marker.
Center V Position –40 to 0 to 40 Specifies the vertical position of the
center marker.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
114
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Marker
Makes settings related
to marker display in the
viewfinder screen.
Safety Zone On/Off Turns the safety zone display on or
off.
Note
When Center Marker, User Box, and
Guide Frame are set to [On], this
setting cannot be turned on.
Safety Area 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the safety zone range.
Aspect Marker Line/Mask/Off When an aspect marker is to be
displayed, selects the display
method. Select Off if you do not
want to display the marker.
Line: Show as white lines.
Mask: Display by lowering the
video signal level of areas
outside the marker range.
Aspect Select 15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/
1.66:1/1.85:1/2.35:1/
2.4:1
Selects the aspect ratio of the
marker.
Aspect Mask 0% to 30% to 90% (10%
step)
When the Aspect Marker setting is
Mask, specifies the video signal
level of areas outside the marker
range as a percentage value relative
to the video signal level of areas
inside the marker range.
User Box On/Off Turns the box cursor display on or
off.
Note
When Center Marker, Safety Zone, and
Guide Frame are set to [On], this
setting cannot be turned on.
User Box Width 40 to 500 to 999 Specifies the box cursor width
(distance from the center to the left
and right edges).
User Box Height 70 to 500 to 999 Specifies the box cursor height
(distance from the center to the top
and bottom edges).
User Box H Position –479 to 0 to 479 Specifies the horizontal position of
the box cursor center.
User Box V Position –464 to 0 to 464 Specifies the vertical position of the
box cursor center.
Guide Frame On/Off Turns display of the guide frame on
or off.
Note
When Center Marker, Safety Zone, and
User Box are set to [On], this setting
cannot be turned on.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 115
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Gain Switch
Makes settings related
to the GAIN switch.
Gain Low –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB
Specifies the gain value for the
L position of the GAIN switch.
Gain Mid –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB
Specifies the gain value for the
M position of the GAIN switch.
Gain High –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB
Specifies the gain value for the
H position of the GAIN switch.
Gain Turbo –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB/24dB
Specifies the gain value for the
Turbo Gain function, which can be
assigned to an assignable switch.
Shockless Gain On/Off Turns shockless gain (a function that
switches smoothly when the gain is
switched) on or off.
TLCS
Makes settings related
to total level control.
Mode Backlight/Standard/
Spotlight
Selects the auto iris mode used when
the TLCS system is activated.
Backlight: Backlight mode (lessens
the blackout of the main subject
that occurs under backlit
conditions)
Standard: Standard mode
Spotlight: Spotlight mode (lessens
the whiteout of the main subject
that occurs under a spotlight)
Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the control speed (speed of
reaction to changes in the video)
used when the TLCS system is
activated. (Larger values specify
quicker reaction times.)
AGC On/Off Turns the AGC (auto gain control)
function on or off.
AGC Limit 3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB
Specifies the maximum gain used
when AGC is on.
AGC Point F5.6/F4/F2.8 Specifies the F value where control
by auto iris switches to control by
AGC, used when AGC is on.
Auto Shutter On/Off Turns the auto shutter function on or
off.
Auto Shutter Limit 1/100 / 1/150 / 1/200 /
1/250
Selects the maximum shutter speed
used when auto shutter is on.
Auto Shutter Point F5.6/F8/F11/F16 Specifies the F value where control
by auto iris switches to control by
auto shutter, used when auto shutter
is on.
Zebra
Makes settings related
to zebra displays.
Zebra Select 1/2/BOTH Selects the zebra pattern type
(Zebra1, Zebra2, Both).
Zebra1 Level 50% to 70% to 107% Specifies the Zebra1 display level.
Zebra1 Aperture
Level
1 to 10% to 20% Specifies the Zebra1 aperture level.
Zebra2 Level 52% to 100% to 109% Specifies the Zebra2 display level.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
116
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Display On/Off
Selects the items to
display in the
viewfinder screen.
Video Level
Warnings
On/Off Turns the warnings that appear when
the video level is too bright or too
dark on or off.
Brightness Display On/Off Turns the numerical indication of the
video brightness on or off.
Histogram Display On/Off Turns the histogram display of video
signal levels on or off (in HD mode
only).
Lens Info Off/Meter/Feet Selects whether or not to display the
depth of field indication and the unit
for display of the depth of field.
Meter: Displayed in meters
Feet: Displayed in feet
Off: Do not display
Focus Position On/Off Turns the indication of the lens focus
position on or off.
Zoom Position On/Off Turns the indication of the lens
zoom position on or off.
Audio Level Meter On/Off Turns the display of the audio level
meters on or off.
Timecode On/Off Turns the display of time data
(timecode, user bits, counter,
duration) on or off.
Battery Remain On/Off Turns the indications of the
remaining battery time and input
voltage on or off.
Media Remain On/Off Turns the indication of the
remaining media capacity on or off.
TLCS Mode On/Off Turns the indication of the TLCS
operating mode on or off.
Focus Mode On/Off Turns the indication of the focus
operating mode on or off.
White Balance Mode On/Off Turns the indication of the white
balance mode on or off.
Filter Position On/Off Turns the indication of the ND filter
setting on or off.
Iris Position On/Off Turns the indication of the iris
position on or off.
Gain Setting On/Off Turns the indication of the gain
setting on or off.
Shutter Setting On/Off Turns the indications of the shutter
mode and shutter speed on or off.
Color Temp On/Off Turns the indication of the color
temperature on or off.
Video Format On/Off Turns the indication of the video
format on or off.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 117
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Display On/Off
Selects the items to
display in the
viewfinder screen.
System Line On/Off Turns the indication of the system
lines on or off.
Rec Mode On/Off Turns the indication of special
recording modes (S&Q, Interval,
Frame Rec, Picture Cache Rec) on
or off.
WRR RF Level On/Off Turns the indication of the digital
wireless receiver reception level on
or off.
Clip Number(PB) On/Off Turns the indication of clip
information on or off.
VF Display On/Off Turns the viewfinder output image
type display on or off.
Auto Conv.
Makes settings related
to auto convergence.
Adjust Point 20%Far/10%Far/Focus
Point/10%Near/20%Near
Selects the position to which to
move the convergence point relative
to the focus point when using auto
convergence.
20%Far: 20% further away
10%Far: 10% further away
Focus Point: Focus position
10%Near: 10% closer
20%Near: 20% closer
Adjust Lens (R)
Adjusts differences
between left lens and
right lens.
(see page 157)
Vertical Axis –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the optical axis.
Zoom –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the zoom.
Focus –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the focus.
Iris –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the iris.
Auto Iris
Makes settings related
to auto iris.
Iris Override On/Off Turns iris override (a setting that
opens or closes the iris more than
normal) on or off.
Iris Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the iris control speed
(speed of reaction to changes in the
video). (Larger values specify
quicker reaction times.)
Clip High light On/Off Turns on or off the function that
disregards highlights and forces a
flatter reaction to high luminance.
Iris Window 1/2/3/4/5/6/Var Selects the auto iris detection
window type.
Var: Va r ia ble
Iris Window
Indication
On/Off Turns the indication of the auto iris
detection window frame on or off.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
118
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
White Setting
Makes settings related
to auto white balance
adjustments.
White Switch<B> Memory/ATW Specifies the operating mode
selected by the B position of the
WHITE BAL switch.
Memory: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
Shockless White Off/1/2/3 Specifies the reaction speed when
the WHITE BAL switch setting is
changed. Off is an instant reaction,
and 1 is faster than 2 or 3.
ATW Speed 1/2/3/4/5 Specifies the reaction speed when
the White Switch<B> setting is
[ATW]. 1 is the fastest reaction.
AWB Fixed Area On/Off Specifies whether auto white
balance is executed at the center of
the screen.
On: Execute in an area
corresponding to 25% of the
height and width of the screen.
Off: Execute in an area
corresponding to 70% of the
height and width of the screen.
Filter White Memory On/Off Specifies whether to allocate a white
balance memory area for each
FILTER knob position.
On: Allocation a white balance
memory area for each FILTER
knob position.
Off: Use A/B memory regardless of
the filter position.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 119
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Offset White
Makes settings related
to white balance offset
values.
Offset White <A> On/Off Specifies whether to add (On) or not
to add (Off) an offset value to the
white balance value in memory A.
Warm Cool <A> Approximate color
temperature
When the setting of Offset
White<A> is [On], specifies (as a
color temperature) the offset to add
to the white balance value in
memory A. (Note that the error
range becomes larger for higher
offset color temperatures. Adjust
while viewing the actual video.)
Warm Cool
Balance<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color
temperature, for use when
satisfactory video cannot be
obtained with the Warm Cool <A>
setting.
Offset White <B> On/Off When this is set to [On], the offset
adjusted set with this item is added
to the white balance of channel B.
Warm Cool <B> Approximate color
temperature
When the setting of Offset
White<B> is [On], specifies (as a
color temperature) the offset to add
to the white balance value in
memory B. (Note that the error
range becomes larger for higher
offset color temperatures. Adjust
while viewing the actual video.)
Warm Cool
Balance<B>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color
temperature, for use when
satisfactory video cannot be
obtained with the Warm Cool <B>
setting.
Shutter Select
Makes settings related
to shutter speed
selection.
Shutter Select Second/Degree Specifies the unit used to select
shutter speeds.
Second: Select in units of seconds.
Degree: Select in units of degrees.
Time Zone
Specifies the time zone.
Zone –12:00 to +0:00 to
+14:00 (in steps of
30 minutes)
Specifies a difference from UTC
(Greenwich Mean Time) in units of
30 minutes.
Clip
Make settings for clip
name or clip
management.
Note
Do not assign clip
names that begin with
the “.” (period) symbol.
Clips with names in
which the first
character is “.” cannot
be viewed on the
application software for
computers.
Auto Naming Title/Plan Selects the clip naming format.
Title: Name specified by Title Prefix
Plan: Name specified in planning
metadata (if no name is
specified in planning metadata,
the name specified by Title
Prefix is selected.)
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
120
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Clip
Make settings for clip
name or clip
management.
Note
Do not assign clip
names that begin with
the “.” (period) symbol.
Clips with names in
which the first
character is “.” cannot
be viewed on the
application software for
computers.
Title Prefix Text input Specifies the title part (4 to 46
alphanumeric characters) of clip
titles.
When the currently specified title is
eight characters or fewer in length,
the entire title appears. When the
title is longer than eight characters,
the first seven characters appear and
a “···” symbol appears in place of the
eighth character.
Displays the Character Set screen.
Character Set screen configuration
• Character selection area (three
lines)
Select the character to insert at the
title prefix cursor position.
!#$%()+.-.;=@[]^_~0123456789
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZ
• Cursor operation area (one line)
Space: Changes the character at the
cursor position to a space
INS: Inserts a space at the cursor
position
DEL: Deletes the character at the
cursor position
T: Moves the cursor to the left
t: Moves the cursor to the right
ESC: Cancels the change and return
to the normal menu
END: Executes the change and
return to the normal menu
• Title prefix area (one line)
An area to enter the title
To set titles
1Turn the MENU knob or press the
arrow buttons to select a
character, highlighting it, in the
character selection area, and then
press the MENU knob or the SET
button to insert it at the cursor
position in the title prefix area.
(The cursor moves to the right.)
2Repeat step 1 to add more
characters to the title (using
Space, INS, and DEL as
required).
3When you have finished entering
the title, select END to close the
Character Set screen.
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 121
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Clip
Make settings for clip
name or clip
management.
Note
Do not assign clip
names that begin with
the “.” (period) symbol.
Clips with names in
which the first
character is “.” cannot
be viewed on the
application software for
computers.
Number Set 0001 to 9999 Specifies the initial value of the
numeric part (four digits) of clip
names (unless the name specified in
planning metadata with Auto
Naming set to [Plan]).
Name Display Off/On Selects whether to display the name
of the next clips to be recorded in E-
E mode (On) or not (Off).
Update Media(A)-L/Media(A)-
R/Media(B)-L/Media(B)-
R
Updates the management files on the
media in the selected slot (execute
by selecting Execute).
Plan.Metadata
Makes settings for
operating planning
metadata.
Load/Slot(A) Execute/Cancel Executes load of planning metadata
from the SxS memory card in slot A.
Select [Execute] to show the list of the
planning metadata files stored in the
slot A SxS memory card and select a
file to execute the load.
Load/Slot(B) Execute/Cancel Executes load of planning metadata
from the SxS memory card in slot B.
Select [Execute] to show the list of
the planning metadata files stored in
the slot B SxS memory card and
select a file to execute the load.
Properties Execute/Cancel Displays the detailed information in
the planning metadata loaded on the
camcorder (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Clear Execute/Cancel Clears the planning metadata loaded
on the camcorder (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Clip Name Disp Title1(ASCII)
Title2(UTF-8)
Selects the display mode of the clip
name specified in planning metadata
(see page 86).
OPERATION
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
122
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Settings in bold are the factory default values.
PAINT Menu
PAIN T
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Switch Status
Turns various signal
correction functions
and a test signal on or
off.
Gamma On/Off Turns gamma correction on or off.
Black Gamma On/Off Turns black gamma correction on or
off.
Matrix On/Off Turns linear matrix correction and
user matrix correction on or off.
Knee On/Off Turns knee correction on or off.
White Clip On/Off Turns white clip correction on or
off.
Detail On/Off Turns detail correction on or off.
Aperture On/Off Turns aperture correction on or off.
Flare On/Off Turns flare correction on or off.
Test Saw On/Off Turns the test saw signal on or off.
White
Sets the color
temperature, and
performs manual white
balance adjustment.
Color Temp <A> 1500K to 3200K to
50000K (reference
values)
Displays the white balance color
temperature saved in memory A.
Color Temp BAL
<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance gain
values saved in memory A (linked R
gain and B gain).
R Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance R gain
value saved in memory A.
B Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance B gain
value saved in memory A.
Color Temp <B> 1500K to 3200K to
50000K (reference
values)
Displays the white balance color
temperature saved in memory B.
Color Temp BAL
<B>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance gain
values saved in memory B (linked R
gain and B gain).
R Gain <B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance R gain
value saved in memory B.
B Gain <B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white balance B gain
value saved in memory B.
Black
Specifies the black
level (level of the
unilluminated parts of
the video).
You can achieve a
desired look by
adjusting the black
level for deeper or
shallower blacks.
Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master black level.
R Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R black level.
B Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B black level.
Menu List 123
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Flare
Makes settings related
to flare.
Flare is light generated
from a bright image
region that spreads
broadly across the
image, adding light to
dark regions and
reducing contrast. It is
caused by reflection
inside the lens system.
Flare On/Off Turns flare correction on or off.
Master Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master flare correction
level.
R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R flare correction level.
G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G flare correction level.
B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B flare correction level.
Gamma
Makes settings related
to gamma.
Gamma correction
allows you to
significantly alter the
impression made by the
video by adjusting the
contrast.
Gamma On/Off Turns gamma correction on or off.
Step Gamma 0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90 (0.05
step)
Specifies a gamma correction value
in steps of 0.05
Master Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master gamma level.
R Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R gamma level.
G Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the G gamma level.
B Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B gamma level.
Gamma Select The available settings
vary depending on the
setting in Gamma
Category (see
“Description”).
Select the gamma table to use in
gamma correction.
When Gamma Category is STD:
1 DVW: DVW camcorder
equivalent
2 ×4.5: ×4.5 gain
3 ×3.5: ×3.5 gain
4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent
(default setting)
6 ×5.0: ×5.0 gain
When Gamma Category is HG:
1 3250: Condense 325% video input
to 100% video output
2 4600: Condense 460% video input
to 100% video output
3 3259: Condense 325% video input
to 109% video output
4 4609: Condense 460% video input
to 109% video output (default
setting)
Gamma Category STD/HG Selects use of standard gamma
(STD) or HyperGamma (HG).
Black Gamma
Makes settings related
to black gamma
correction.
Black gamma
correction allows you
to reproduce gradations
and color nuances in
black or near-black
(dark) parts of the
picture.
Black Gamma On/Off Turns black gamma correction on or
off.
Gamma Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the master black gamma
level.
Range Low/L.Mid/H.Mid/High Selects the black gamma correction
effective range.
LOW: 0 to 3.6%
L.MID: 0 to 7.2%
H.MID: 0 to 14.4%
HIGH: 0 to 28.8%
PAIN T
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
124
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Knee
Makes settings related
to knee correction.
Knee correction is
processing that
prevents washout by
compressing the bright
parts of the video
according to an upper
limit for the dynamic
range of the recorded
and output picture. The
signal level where knee
processing begins is
called the “knee point”,
and the slope of knee
compression is called
the “knee slope”.
Knee On/Off Turns knee correction on or off.
Knee Point 50.0% to 90.0% to
109.0%
Specifies the knee point.
Knee Slope –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee slope.
Knee Saturation On/Off Turns the knee saturation function
on or off.
Knee Saturation
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee saturation level.
White Clip
Makes settings related
to white clipping
adjustments.
White clipping is
processing that limits
the maximum level of
video output signals.
The maximum video
signal output value is
called the “white clip
level”.
White Clip On/Off Turns white clipping adjustment on
or off.
Level 90.0% to 109.0% Specifies the white clip level.
PAIN T
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 125
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Detail
Makes settings related
to details adjustments.
Detail adjustment is
processing that
improves the clarity of
the video by adding
detail signals to the
edges of the subject.
Detail On/Off Turns detail adjustment on or off.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the detail level.
H/V Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the mix ratio between the
H detail level and the V detail level.
Crispening –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the crispening level.
Level Depend On/Off Turns the level depend adjustment
function on or off.
Level Depend Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the level depend level.
Frequency –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the central frequency for H
detail signals. Larger values give
finer details.
Knee Aperture On/Off Turns the knee aperture function on
or off.
Knee Aperture Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the knee aperture level.
Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the detail limiter values for
both the white-side and black-side
direction.
White Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the white-side detail
limiter value.
Black Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the black-side detail
limiter value.
V-BLK Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the black-side V detail
limiter value.
V Detail Creation NAM/G/R+G/YSelects the source signal used to
generate the V detail signal.
NAM: A V detail signal created
from the R signal, or a V detail
signal created from the G
signal, or a V detail signal
created from the B signal,
whichever is the signal with the
highest level
G: G signal
G+R: Composite signal comprising
the G signal and R signal in a
1:1 ratio
Y: Y signal
Aperture
Makes settings related
to aperture correction.
Aperture correction is
processing to improve
resolution by adding
high-frequency
aperture signals to the
video signal, which
corrects degeneration
due to high-frequency
characteristics.
Aperture On/Off Turns aperture correction on or off.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the aperture level.
PAIN T
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
126
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Skin Detail
Makes settings related
to skin detail
correction.
Skin detail correction is
processing that
increases or decreases
the detail level of a
specified color range
(skin tone range), for
the purpose of
obtaining attractive
reproduction of skin
tones.
Skin Detail On/Off Turns skin detail correction on or
off.
Area Detection Color detection screen Detects the color to be targeted by
skin detail correction.
Area Indication On/Off Turns on or off the function that
displays a zebra pattern in the area
targeted by skin detail correction.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the skin detail level.
Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation of the color
targeted by skin detail correction.
Hue 0 to 359 Specifies the hue of the color
targeted by skin detail correction.
Width 0 to 40 to 90 Specifies a range for the hue of the
color targeted by skin detail
correction.
Matrix
Makes settings related
to matrix correction.
Matrix correction
allows you to adjust the
color and vividness of
the video. Depending
on the effect you want,
you can select one from
among a number of
preset matrixes, which
define different
parameter sets. Or you
can select a user matrix
with your own
parameters.
Matrix On/Off Turns the matrix correction function
on or off.
Preset Matrix On/Off Turns the preset matrix function on
or off.
Preset Select 1/2/3/4/5/6 Selects a preset matrix.
1: SMPTE-240M equivalent
2: ITU-709 equivalent
3: SMPTE WIDE equivalent
4: SD equivalent
5: EBU equivalent
6: Standard
User Matrix On/Off Turns the user matrix function on or
off.
User Matrix R-G –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined R-G user
matrix.
User Matrix R-B –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined R-B user
matrix.
User Matrix G-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined G-R user
matrix.
User Matrix G-B –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined G-B user
matrix.
User Matrix B-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined B-R user
matrix.
User Matrix B-G –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a freely defined B-G user
matrix.
PAIN T
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 127
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Settings in bold are the factory default values.
Multi Matrix
Makes settings related
to multi matrix
correction.
Multi-matrix correction
allows specific colors
to be selected for
saturation correction in
a 16-axis hue space.
Multi Matrix On/Off Turns the multi matrix correction
function on or off.
Area Indication On/Off Turns on or off the function that
displays a zebra pattern in the color
area targeted by multi matrix
correction.
Color Detection Color detection screen Detects colors targeted by multi
matrix correction.
Axis B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/
R/R+/YL–/YL/YL+/G–/
G/G+/CY/CY+/B–
Specifies a color targeted by multi
matrix correction (16-axis mode)
Hue –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the hue of the color
targeted by multi matrix correction
for each 16-axis mode.
Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation of the color
targeted by multi matrix correction
for each 16-axis mode.
Low Key Sat.
Makes settings related
to low key saturation
correction.
You can correct the
saturation of colors in
dark parts of the video
only.
Low Key Saturation On/Off Turns low key saturation correction
on or off.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the saturation of colors in
low luminance areas.
Range Low/L.Mid/H.Mid/High Specifies the luminance level for
which low key saturation is enabled.
PAIN T
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
MAINTENANCE Menu
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
White Shading
Makes settings related
to white shading.
White shading is
required for each
different lens to correct
irregularities arising
from lens
characteristics. It
corrects luminance and
color irregularities in
bright areas.
Channel Select R(Left)/G(Left)/B(Left)/
R(Right)/G(Right)/
B(Right)
Selects the target of white shading
correction.
R/G/B White H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW white shading
correction value for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B White H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola white shading
correction value for the horizontal
direction.
R/G/B White V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a SAW white shading
correction value for the vertical
direction.
R/G/B White V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a parabola white shading
correction value for the vertical
direction.
White Saw/Para On/Off Turns the white shading SAW and
parabola correction functions on or
off.
Menu List
128
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Battery
Makes settings related
to batteries.
Info Before End 5%/10%/15%...95%/
100%
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when a BP-GL95A battery
pack is used.
Info End 0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5% Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery End” warning
when a BP-GL95A battery pack is
used.
Sony Before End 11.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when a BP-L60S/L80S
battery pack is used.
Sony End 11.0V to 11.5V
(0.1V step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery End” warning
when a BP-L60S/L80S battery pack
is used.
Other Before End 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when a non-Sony battery
pack is used.
Other End 11.0V to 14.0V
(0.1V step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery End” warning
when a non-Sony battery pack is
used.
DC In Before End 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery Near End”
warning when an external power
source is connected to the DC IN
connector.
DC In End 11.0V to 14.0V
(0.1V step)
Specifies a threshold value that
triggers a “Battery End” warning
when an external power source is
connected to the DC IN connector.
Detected Battery Info/Sony/Other/DC IN Displays the results of automatic
battery pack type detection.
Type Detection Auto/Other Auto: Detect the battery type
automatically.
Other: Fix battery type detection as
“Other”.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 129
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Battery
Makes settings related
to batteries.
Segment No.10 11.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Specify voltage threshold values
that cause remaining capacity
segments to go off in the display of
remaining battery capacity (see
page 34). (The segments go off
below the specified value.)
These values are used when the
battery type has been found to be
“Other”.
Segment No.9 11.0V to 16.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.8 11.0V to 15.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.7 11.0V to 14.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.6 11.0V to 13.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.5 11.0V to 13.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.4 11.0V to 12.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.3 11.0V to 12.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.2 11.0V to 11.5V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Segment No.1 11.0V to 17.0V
(0.1V step)
Audio
Makes settings related
to audio.
Front MIC Select Mono/Stereo Selects whether the front
microphone is monaural (Mono) or
stereo (Stereo).
Audio CH3/4 Mode Ch1/2 / Switch Selects the input signals for the
AUDIO IN CH3/CH4 connectors.
Ch1/2: The same signals as the
AUDIO IN CH1/ CH2
connectors.
Switch: The signals selected with
the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4
switches.
Front MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB
Selects the reference level for
channel 1 of the front microphone.
Front MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB
Selects the reference level for
channel 2 of the front microphone.
Rear MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB
Selects the reference input level
when the setting of the AUDIO IN
CH1 switch is MIC.
Rear MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB/–20dB
Selects the reference input level
when the setting of the AUDIO IN
CH2 switch is MIC.
Line Input Ref +4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL Selects the reference input level
when the AUDIO IN CH1 and
AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to
LINE.
Min Alarm Volume Off/Set Selects the volume when the
ALARM knob is turned all the way
down.
Off: Almost inaudible
Set: Fairly audible
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
130
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Audio
Makes settings related
to audio.
Speaker Attenuate Off/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB Selects the volume from the monitor
speaker (does not affect earphone
volume).
Headphone Out Mono/Stereo Selects whether the earphones are
monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Reference Level –20dB/–18dB/–16dB/
–12dB/EBUL
Selects the output level of the 1 kHz
test signal.
Reference Out 0dB/+4dB/–3dB/EBUL Specifies the output level with
respect to the reference input level.
CH1&2 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo For automatic adjustment of the
input level of analog audio signals
recorded on channels 1 and 2,
specifies whether to make the
adjustments separately for each
channel (Mono) or in stereo mode
(Stereo).
CH3&4 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo For automatic adjustment of the
input level of analog audio signals
recorded on channels 3 and 4,
specifies whether to make the
adjustments separately for each
channel (Mono) or in stereo mode
(Stereo).
AGC Spec –6dB/–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
Selects the AGC saturation level.
Limiter Mode Off/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
For manual audio level adjustments,
selects the saturation level for the
limiter applied to loud input signals.
Select Off if you do not wish to use
the limiter.
Output Limiter On/Off Turns the audio output limiter on or
off.
CH1 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 1 wind filter on or
off.
CH2 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 2 wind filter on or
off.
CH3 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 3 wind filter on or
off.
CH4 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 4 wind filter on or
off.
Audio SG (1KHz) On/Off/Auto Selects whether to output (On) or
not output (Off) a 1 kHz test signal
in color bar mode.
Auto: Output a test signal only
when the AUDIO SELECT
CH1 switch is set to AUTO.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 131
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Audio
Makes settings related
to audio.
MIC CH1 Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 For recording input audio from the
front microphone on channel 1,
selects the knob that adjusts the
audio level.
Side1: The LEVEL knob (left) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side1: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (left) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
MIC CH2 Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 For recording input audio from the
front microphone on channel 2,
selects the knob that adjusts the
audio level.
Side2: The LEVEL knob (right) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side2: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (right) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
Rear1/WRR Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 Selects the knob that adjusts the
audio levels of a wireless
microphone and a device connected
to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on
the rear panel.
Side1: The LEVEL knob (left) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side1: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (left) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
Rear2/WRR Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 Selects the knob that adjusts the
audio levels of a wireless
microphone and a device connected
to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on
the rear panel.
Side2: The LEVEL knob (right) on
the side panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side2: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob (right) and the
MIC LEVEL control.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
132
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Audio
Makes settings related
to audio.
Audio CH3 Level Side3/Front/Front+Side3 Selects the knob that adjusts the
level of audio recorded on channel
3.
Side3: The LEVEL knob on side
panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side3: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob and the MIC
LEVEL control.
Audio CH4 Level Side4/Front/Front+Side4 Selects the knob that adjusts the
level of audio recorded on channel
4.
Side4: The LEVEL knob on side
panel
Front: The MIC LEVEL control on
the front panel
Front+Side4: Adjust with both the
LEVEL knob and the MIC
LEVEL control.
WRR Setting
Makes settings related
to the wireless tuner.
WRR Valid CH Sel All/CH1 Selects whether to enable channels 1
and 2 of the wireless receiver (All)
or channel 1 only (CH1).
WRR CH Select TX1/TX2 Specifies the target channel for other
sub-items.
TX1: Channel 1
TX2: Channel 2
WRR Delay Comp On/Off Enables (On) or disables (Off) delay
compensation for wireless audio
input. (When On is selected, the
audio in all E-E output is delayed by
about 8 ms.)
TX --- Displays the name of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on
the channel selected by WRR CH
SELECT.
TX Audio Peak ---/Peak Displays whether the AF level of the
transmitter whose signals are being
received on the channel selected by
WRR CH SELECT are over peak.
TX Input Level ---/Mic/Line Displays whether the input level of
the transmitter whose signals are
being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT is
set to microphone (Mic) or line
(Line).
TX ATT Level --- Sets the ATT level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on
the channel selected by WRR CH
SELECT. (The setting range varies
depending on the transmitter.)
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 133
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
WRR Setting
Makes settings related
to the wireless tuner.
TX LCF Freq --- Sets the low cut filter frequency of
the transmitter whose signals are
being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT.
(The setting range varies depending
on the transmitter.)
TX System Delay Auto/0.0ms to 8.0ms Specifies the amount of audio delay.
Auto: Automatically adjusts the
amount of delay so that the
delay in the audio received
from the wireless transmitter is
zero.
0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of
anticipated wireless system
delay, for cases in which
several wireless systems are
being used over a devices such
as an audio mixer.
Timecode
Makes settings related
to timecode.
TC Out Auto/Generator Selects the source for timecode
output.
Auto: During recording, output
values generated by the
timecode generator, and during
playback output values
obtained by the timecode
reader.
Generator: Output values
generated by the timecode
generator during both recording
and playback.
DF/NDF DF/NDF When the Country setting is other
than [PAL Area], selects drop-frame
mode (DF) or non-drop-frame mode
(NDF).
LTC UBIT Fix/Time Specifies the data recorded in LTC
user bits.
Fix: Record user-specified data.
Time: Record the current time.
Counter Display Counter/Duration Select the method used to reset the
counter value displayed on the
viewfinder screen.
Counter: Continue to increment
until the RESET button is
pressed.
Duration: Reset each time that
recording is started.
Essence Mark
Makes settings related
to shot marks and clip
index picture
thumbnails.
Ret Shot Mark 1 On/Off Specify whether to input Shot
Mark1 marks using the RET button
on the lens.
Ret Shot Mark 2 On/Off Specify whether to input Shot
Mark2 marks using the RET button
on the lens.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
134
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Camera Config
Makes settings related
to various camcorder
operations.
Rec Tally Blink On/Off Turns warning flashes by the
TALLY indicator on or off. The
warnings alert you an almost
exhausted battery pack or low
remaining media capacity.
Rec Review 3sec/10sec/Clip Selects the recording review time.
Clip: Review all of the most
recently recorded clip.
HD SDI Remote I/F Off/Chara/G-Tally/
R-Tally
Selects whether to use the function
that enables recording control from
this camcorder of an external device
connected to the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector (HDSDI output). When
the function is used, also selects the
indication that shows whether the
external device is recording.
Off: Do not use the remote
recording control function.
Chara: Indicate by the external
device control indication on the
viewfinder screen.
R-Tally: Indicates by the recording
mode/operation status
indication on the viewfinder
screen.
Color Bars Select ARIB/100%/75%/
SMPTE
Selects the color bar type.
RM Common
Memory
On/Off Selects whether to share (On) or not
share (Off) settings between times
when a remote control unit is
connected and times when the
camcorder is used locally.
RM Rec Start RM/CAM/PARA For times when a remote control
unit is connected, selects whether
recording start/stop buttons are
enabled on the camcorder or the
remote control unit.
RM: Remote control unit
CAM: Camcorder
PARA: Both
Menu Scroll Normal/Loop Sets the movement when scrolling
the menu.
Normal: Stops at the top and
bottom.
Loop: Loops between top and
bottom.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 135
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Preset White
Makes settings related
to white balance preset
values.
Color Temp<P> 1500K to 3200K to
50000K (reference
values)
Specifies the white balance preset
value.
Color Temp
Balance<P>
–99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies finer color temperature
settings, for use when satisfactory
video cannot be obtained with Color
Temp<P>.
R Gain <P> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the R gain preset value.
B Gain <P> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the B gain preset value.
AWB Enable <P> On /Off Turns on and off execution of the
AWB (auto white balance) function
when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to PRST.
White Filter
Makes settings related
to filters.
ND Filter C.Temp On/Off Turns the function that assigns
electrical CC filters to ND filters on
or off.
ND FLT C.Temp<1> 3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K
Selects the color temperature for
when electrical CC filters are
assigned to ND filters.
ND FLT C.Temp<2-
4>
3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K
Selects the color temperature for
when electrical CC filters are
assigned to ND filters.
Electrical CC<A> 3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K
Selects the color temperature for
when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Electrical CC<B> 3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K
Selects the color temperature for
when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Electrical CC<C> 3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K/-----
Selects the color temperature for
when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Select “----” if you do not want to
use C.
Electrical CC<D> 3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K/-----
Selects the color temperature for
when the electrical CC filter
switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Select “----” if you do not want to
use D.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
136
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Auto Iris2
Makes settings related
to auto iris.
Iris Window 1/2/3/4/5/6/Var Selects the type of iris detection
window.
Var: Va r ia ble
Iris Window Ind On/Off Turns on or off the function that
displays a frame marker for the auto
iris detection window.
Iris Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the level of the auto iris
target value.
Iris APL Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris
detection peak value and average
value (available when OPERATION
>TLCS >Mode is set to [Standard]).
Iris Var Width 40 to 500 to 999 Adjusts the width of the detection
window when the setting of Iris
Window is VAR.
Iris Var Height 70 to 500 to 999 Adjusts the height of the detection
window when the setting of Iris
Window is VAR.
Iris Var H Position –249 to 0 to +249 Specifies the horizontal position of
the detection window when the
setting of Iris Window is VAR.
Iris Var V Position –249 to 0 to +249 Specifies the vertical position of the
detection window when the setting
of Iris Window is VAR.
Iris Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the control speed (speed of
reaction to changes in the video).
(Larger values specify quicker
reaction times.)
Clip High Light On/Off Turns on or off the function that
disregards highlights and forces a
flatter reaction to high luminance.
Flicker Reduce
In 2D mode, makes
settings related to
flicker reduction.
Reduces the flicker that
can occur when a
subject is shot under a
light source with a
periodically varying
brightness, such as
fluorescent lights, due
to the relationship with
the camcorder’s
recording frame rate.
Mode Auto/On/Off Enables or disables flicker
reduction.
On: Always enabled.
Auto: Enabled when flicker is
detected.
Off: Disabled
Frequency 60Hz/50Hz Set to the frequency of the lighting
fixture that is causing the flicker.
(The factory default setting is 50 Hz
when the Country setting is
“PAL Area”, 60 Hz when it is other
than “PAL Area”.)
Genlock
Makes settings related
to genlock.
H Phase(HD) –999 to ±0 to +999 Specifies the H phase of HD output
when genlock is enabled.
H Phase(SD) –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies the H phase of SD output
when genlock is enabled.
Reference Internal/Genlock Displays the type of reference signal
used by the camcorder.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 137
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
ND Comp
Makes settings related
to ND filter color
compensation.
Although the
differences are very
slight, each of the built-
in ND filters has
different color
characteristics. When
you switch between ND
filters, the white
balance may be
disturbed. You can
correct for these slight
color differences
automatically by
registering
compensation values
for each filter.
ND Offset Adjust On/Off ND filter color compensation
function.
Clear ND Offset Execute/Cancel Clears ND filter color compensation
values (execute by selecting
Execute).
Lens
Executes lens
adjustment.
(see page 157)
Auto FB Adjust Execute/Cancel Executes auto flange back
adjustment (execute by selecting
Execute).
Config Start Zoom/Focus/Iris/Vertical
Axis/Cancel
Starts specified lens error
adjustment for multiple points.
Config Clear Execute/Cancel Clears specified lens error
adjustment values for multiple
points.
Config Status Zoom/Focus/Iris/Vertical
Axis/Cancel
Displays lens error correction values
for multiple points.
Network Setting
Makes settings for
network connection.
Notes
• The CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter is
required.
• This item is disabled
(displayed in grey)
during recording and
play.
For details on
network connection,
refer to the
Supplement supplied
in the CD-ROM
(labeled “Manuals for
Solid-State Memory
3D Camcorder”).
DHCP Enable/Disable Selects whether to acquire the IP
address automatically from a DHCP
server (Enable) or not (Disable).
IP Address 0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
(192.168.1.10)
When DHCP is set to [Disable], sets
the IP address.
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
When DHCP is set to [Disable], sets
the subnet mask.
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
When DHCP is set to [Disable], sets
the default gateway.
User Name admin Sets a desired user name in 1 to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Password pmw-td300 (model
name)
Sets a password (model name) in 0
to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Set Execute/Cancel Confirms the settings in Network
Settings (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
Net Config Reset Execute/Cancel Resets the settings in Network
Settings to the preset values
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
138
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Wi-Fi Setting
Makes settings for
Wi-Fi connection.
Notes
• The CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter is
required.
• This item is disabled
(displayed in grey)
during recording and
play.
For details on Wi-Fi
connection, refer to
the Supplement
supplied in the CD-
ROM (labeled
“Manuals for Solid-
State Memory 3D
Camcorder”).
Scan Networks Execute/Cancel When Wi-Fi is set to [Enable], scan
the available network connection.
SSID Network connection
name
Sets the network connection name
of up to 32 characters.
Network Type Infra/Adhoc Selects the connection mode.
Infra: Infrastructure mode
Adhoc: Ad hoc mode
Ch 1 to 11 When Network Type is set to
[Adhoc], set the wireless channel.
Authentication Open/Shared/WPA/
WPA2
Selects the network authentication.
OPEN: Open system authentication
SHARED: Shared key
authentication
WPA: WPA (Wi-Fi Protected
Access) authentication
WPA2: WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected
Access 2) authentication
Encryption Disable/WEP/TKIP/AES Selects whether to apply data
encryption and the type of data
encryption.
Disable: Do not apply data
encryption.
WEP: Apply WEP (Wired
Equivalent Privacy) when
Authentication is set to [Open]
or [Shared]
TKIP: Apply TKIP (Temporal Key
Integrity Protocol) when
Authentication is set to [WPA]
or [WPA2]
AES: Apply AES (Advanced
Encryption Standard) when
Authentication is set to [WPA]
or [WPA2]
WEP Key Index 1/2/3/4 When Encryption is [WEP], selects
the key index.
Input Select When Encryption is set to
[WEP]: ASCII5,
ASCII13, HEX10,
HEX26
When Encryption is set to
[TKIP] or [AES]:
ASCII8-63, HEX64
Selects the input format depending
on the network key (or security key).
ASCII5: Five characters ASCII
format
ASCII13: 13 characters ASCII
format
HEX10: 10 hexadecimal digits
HEX26: 26 hexadecimal digits
ASCII8-63: 8 to 63 characters
ASCII 8-bit format
HEX64: 64 hexadecimal digits
(characters)
Key Sets the network key (or security
key).
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List 139
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Wi-Fi Setting
Makes settings for
Wi-Fi connection.
Notes
• The CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter is
required.
• This item is disabled
(displayed in grey)
during recording and
play.
For details on Wi-Fi
connection, refer to
the Supplement
supplied in the CD-
ROM (labeled
“Manuals for Solid-
State Memory 3D
Camcorder”).
Set Enables settings for Wi-Fi Setting
when Wi-Fi is set to [Enable]
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Wi-Fi Status xxxxx
Connecting
Displays “Connecting” while
connection is being attempted.
Displays black squares to show the
connection status by the number of
squares when the camcorder is
connected to a computer or a LAN.
Wireless Mode 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n Displays an IEEE802.11 standard.
Wi-Fi Enable/Disable Selects whether to enable or disable
Wi-Fi connection.
Clock Set
Sets the internal clock.
Date/Time Sets the current date and time.
12H/24H 12H/24H Selects the 12-hour format (12H) or
the 24-hour format (24H) for
display of times.
Date Mode YYMMDD/MMDDYY/
DDMMYY
Selects the display format for dates.
YYMMDD: Year, Month, Day
MMDDYY: Month, Day, Year
DDMMYY: Day, Month Year
Language
Selects the language for
messages.
Language English/Chinese Selects the language for messages
from English or Chinese.
Hours Meter
Makes settings related
to the digital hours
meter.
Hours(Sys) Displays the cumulative hours of
use (cannot be reset).
Hours(Reset) Displays the hours of use (can be
reset).
Reset Execute/Cancel Resets Hours(Reset) to 0.
(Execute by selecting Execute.)
Ver si on
Displays the version of
the camcorder, and
updates the camcorder.
Version Displays the software version of the
camcorder (Vx.xx).
Version Up Execute/Cancel Updates the camcorder (execute by
selecting Execute).
Note
This cannot be selected unless an SxS
memory card is inserted.
MAINTENANCE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Menu List
140
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Settings in bold are the factory default values.
FILE Menu
FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
All
Makes settings related
to ALL file operations.
Display Mode Date&Time/Model
Name
Selects the items to be displayed in
the list box that appears when a file
is saved or loaded.
All File Load Execute/Cancel Loads an ALL file (execute by
selecting Execute).
All File Save Execute/Cancel Stores an ALL file (execute by
selecting Execute).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
All Preset Execute/Cancel Return all items to their preset
values (execute by selecting
Execute).
Store All Preset Execute/Cancel Store the current settings of all items
as the preset values (execute by
selecting Execute).
Clear All Preset Execute/Cancel Clear the preset values of all items
(execute by selecting Execute).
3Sec Clr Preset On/Off Turns on or off the function that
clears each preset value when the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch is pushed up and held for
three seconds on the CANCEL/
PRST side.
Network Data Off/On Selects whether to load (On) or not
load (Off) network settings when
loading an ALL file.
Scene
Makes settings related
to scene file operations.
s1 Standard File number and file ID
s2 Standard File number and file ID
s3 Standard File number and file ID
s4 Standard File number and file ID
s5 Standard File number and file ID
sStandard Standard settings
Display Mode Date&Time/Model
Name
Selects the items to be displayed in
the list box that appears when a file
is saved or loaded.
Scene Recall Mem Execute/Cancel Loads a file from internal memory
(execute by selecting Execute).
Scene Store Mem Execute/Cancel Stores a file in internal memory
(execute by selecting Execute).
Scene Recall SxS Execute/Cancel Loads a file from an SxS memory
card (execute by selecting Execute).
Scene Store SxS Execute/Cancel Stores a file to an SxS memory card
(execute by selecting Execute).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
Menu List 141
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Reference
Makes settings related
to reference file
operations.
Reference Store Execute/Cancel Stores the current settings of
reference file items in the reference
file that is maintained in internal
memory (execute by selecting
Execute).
Reference Clear Execute/Cancel Clear the reference file (execute by
selecting Execute).
Reference Load Execute/Cancel Load a reference file from an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
Execute).
Reference Save Execute/Cancel Store a reference file to an SxS
memory card (execute by selecting
Execute).
File ID Assigns a name to a file. Names can
be up to 16 characters in length.
Scene White Data On/Off Selects whether to load (On) or not
load (Off) white balance data when
Scene >Scene Recall or Scene
>Standard is executed.
FILE
Menu items Sub-item Settings Description
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
142
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Using the Assignable SW item of the OPERATION menu, you can assign user-specified functions to the
ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the COLOR TEMP. button, ASSIGN. 6
switch and the RET button.
The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory.
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Switch or button Function Assignable SW setting
ASSIGN. 0 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGN. 1 switch Execute EZ mode, according to the setting of
OPERATION >TLCS.
EZ Mode
ASSIGN. 2 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGN. 3 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGNABLE 4 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch No assignment Off
ASSIGN. 6 switch Turn on or off the grid display in the viewfinder. Grid(VF)
RET button During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.
In the other states: Conduct a recording review
(if playback is allowed).
Lens RET
COLOR TEMP. button Adjust the white balance with the preset white
balance value of 5600K.
Color Temp SW 5600K
Functions that can be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Off No assignment —
Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off. Setting retained
ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW (auto-tracking
white balance) mode
—
Picture Cache Turn the picture cache function on or off. Setting retained
Freeze Mix Execute the freeze mix function. —
Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off. Setting not retained
Zebra Turn zebra display on or off. Setting not retained
Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2. —
OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark. —
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches 143
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Note
Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the
switch at that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2
switch or power the camcorder off and on again.
a) Immediately after you assign a functionThe OPERATION >Rec Function item in the setup menu is disabled (displayed
in grey) and cannot be set when the Picture Cache function is turned on.
Functions that can be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch
Assignable switch setting Function
Off No assignment
Front Mic Switch between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected.
Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off.
Picture Cache a) Turn the picture cache function on or off.
Zebra Turn zebra display on or off.
Functions that can be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches, the
ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the COLOR TEMP. Button
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Off No assignment —
Front Mic Switch between stereo (On) and monaural (Off) when a
stereo microphone is connected.
Setting retained
Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off. Setting retained
Last Clip Delete Delete the most recently recorded clip. —
ATW Turn ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode on or off. Setting not retained
ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode. —
EZ Mode Execute EZ mode according to the setting of
OPERATION >TLCS.
Setting retained
Turbo Gain Execute Turbo Gain according to the setting of
OPERATION >Gain Switch >Gain Turbo.
Setting not retained
Rec Review Conduct a recording review. —
Rec Start or stop recording. —
Picture Cache Turn the picture cache function on or off. Setting retained
Freeze Mix Execute the freeze mix function. Setting not retained
Spotlight Turn the spotlight function in auto iris mode on or off. Setting retained
Backlight Turn the backlight function in auto iris mode on or off. Setting retained
EVF Mode Switch the viewfinder screen between B&W (On) and
color (Off).
Setting retained
BRT Disp Turn the display of the brightness level on or off. Setting retained
Histogram Turn the histogram display on or off. Setting retained
Lens Info Switch the depth of field indication between off,
displayed in meters, and displayed in feet.
Setting retained
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
144
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
Zoom Tele/Wide Assign the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 4, and
assign the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 5
(displayed only when <4> and <5> are set).
—
Zoom Wide/Tele Assign the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 4, and
assign the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 5
(displayed only when <4> and <5> are set).
—
Manual Focus Assist Turn the manual focus assist function on or off. Setting retained
Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off. Setting not retained
Zebra Turn zebra display on or off. Setting not retained
Lens RET During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.
In the other states: Conduct a recording review
(if playback is allowed).
—
Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2. —
OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark. —
Color Temp SW 3200K Adjust the white balance with a 3200K preset value. Setting retained
Color Temp SW 4300K Adjust the white balance with a 4300K preset value. Setting retained
Color Temp SW 5600K Adjust the white balance with a 5600K preset value. Setting retained
Color Temp SW 6300K Adjust the white balance with a 6300K preset value. Setting retained
Electrical CC Function that switches the electrical CC filter (3200K/
4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to white balance
adjustment values.
Each press of the switch or button switches in the order
3200Kt4300Kt5600Kt6300K.
These can also be applied from a menu (apply with
Electrical CC<A><B><C><D>).
Note
This function is not available when White Filter >ND
Filter C.Temp in the Maintenance menu is set to On.
If you set ND Filter C.Temp to On after assigning the
function, the assignable switch ceases to function.
Setting retained
CC5600K Apply a 5600K electrical CC filter to white balance
adjustment values.
Setting retained
Slot Select Switch memory card slot (A or B). —
Grid(VF) Turn the grid display in the viewfinder on or off. Setting retained
Convergence a) Record the convergence point distance when
Convergence is assigned to the assignable switch, and set
the convergence point to the recorded distance when the
assignable switch is used.
You can record different convergence point distances in
multiple assignable switches.
—
Conv. Near/Far Assign the Convergence Near function to ASSIGNABLE
switch 4, and assign the Convergence Far function to
ASSIGNABLE switch 5 (displays only when setting
“<4>” and “<5>”).
—
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches 145
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
a) When changing the convergence point distance recorded in an assignable switch, first assign a function other than
Convergence to the assignable switch, then change the convergence point distance and reassign the Convergence
function to the assignable switch.
Functions that can be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 6 Switch
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Off No assignment —
Grid(VF) Turn the grid display in the viewfinder on or off. Setting retained
Depth Warning Turn the display of the 3D depth warning on or off. Setting retained
Grid & Depth Warn. Perform one of the following, depending on the
viewfinder settings.
L+R, L-R, R, or Anaglyph: Turn the grid display on or
off.
Left (L) display: Turn the 3D depth warning display on
or off.
3D display: No change
Setting retained
Functions that can be Assigned to the RET Button
Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder
is next powered on
Off No assignment —
Lens RET During recording or playback: Write a shot mark.
In the other states: Conduct a recording review (if
playback is allowed).
—
Rec Review Execute recording review. —
Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2. —
OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark. —
Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off. Setting not retained
Assigning Functions to the Lens Dials
146
Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings
You can assign functions to each of the three dials
(outer, mid, inner) on the lens unit. Note that the
same function cannot be assigned to more than
one dial. The functions are assigned to the dials
using OPERATION >Lens Dial >Inner, Mid, or
Outer in the setup menu.
You can also change the direction of rotation of
the dial for each function.
You can assign the following functions to the lens
dials.
• Zoom
• Focus
• Convergence
•Iris
Setting the Direction of Rotation of the
Dials
You can change the direction of rotation of the
dial for each function assigned. The factory
default settings for the direction of rotation of the
dials are shown in the following table. You
change the operation of the dial by assigning
functions to the clockwise direction using the
Focus Clockwise, Zoom Clockwise, Conv.
Clockwise, and Iris Clockwise commands from
OPERATION >Dial Operation in the setup menu.
Note
The inner dial provides coarse adjustment for small
movements of the dial. Consequently, fine adjustment
may be difficult to achieve, depending on the assigned
function.
Assigning Functions to
the Lens Dials
Functions that can be Assigned to
the Lens Dials
Function Clockwise Counterclockwise
Focus Near (Shifts
focus closer)
Far (Shifts focus
further away)
Zoom Tele (Telephoto
zoom-in)
Wide (Wide angle
zoom-out)
Convergence Near (Shifts
convergence
closer)
Far (Shifts
convergence
further away)
Iris Open (Opens
the iris
aperture)
Close (Closes the
iris aperture)
Saving and Loading Settings 147
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
You can save setup menu settings in the
camcorder’s internal memory and on SxS
memory cards. This allows you to quickly recall
an appropriate set of menu settings for the current
situation.
Setting data is saved in the following categories.
ALL files: ALL files save the setting data of all
menus. You can save up to 64 ALL files on
an SxS memory card.
Note
Device specific data (shading, output levels, and
other data that requires adjustment for the specific
device) is not saved.
Scene files: Scene file save adjustments to
PAINT menu items for the purpose of
shooting a particular scene. You can save up
to five scene files in the camcorder’s internal
memory and up to 64 scene files on an SxS
memory card.
Reference files: Reference files save the
reference values that are set when you
execute FILE >Scene >Standard in the setup
menu. You can save one reference file in the
camcorder’s internal memory and one on an
SxS memory card.
The first settings stored in a file are called
“preset” values.
Even after loading files to set up the camcorder,
and overwriting original files with new settings,
you can still recover preset values and reset files
to their initial states (see page 148).
Cards in the left memory card slots are used when
saving settings to or recalling settings from SxS
memory cards.
This section explains how to save setting data in
an ALL file.
Before starting, insert a writable SxS memory
card into a left-side memory card slot.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 101) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >All in the setup menu.
To assign a name to the data before saving
it
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.
For details, see “To assign names to files”
(page 148).
2Select All File Save >Execute.
An ALL file list box appears.
File numbers where “No File” is displayed
are empty file numbers. File numbers with a
file name or a date and time are the number
of files that already contain data.
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired file number.
4Press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the save, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the save, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you choose to execute the save, the
ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on the right-
side panel and in orange in the card slot
section). A completion message appears and
the ACCESS lamp goes out when the data
has been saved to the SxS memory card.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear
during execution of the save, or as soon as you
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not saved
to the SxS memory card.
Chapter7
Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Saving and Loading
Settings
Saving Setting Data
Saving and Loading Settings
148
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
To assign names to files
Assigning a name before you save data in an ALL
file can make it easier to distinguish your files.
The following characters can be used in file
names.
Alphanumeric characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9) and
special characters ( ! # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < =
> ? @ [ \ ] ~)
1Select FILE >All >File ID in the setup
menu.
2Turn the MENU knob to select a
character, and then press the MENU
knob.
3Repeat step 3.
4When you have finished entering
characters, press the MENU knob to
move the cursor to “SET”, and then
press the MENU knob.
The specified name is displayed.
When you save the file (see page 147), the
data will be saved under this name.
Note
When you load a file from an SxS memory card, the data
saved in the camcorder’s internal memory is overwritten.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 101) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >All in the setup menu.
2Select All File Load >Execute.
A list box of ALL files appears.
File numbers where “No File” is displayed
are empty file numbers. File numbers with a
file name or a date and time are the number
of files that already contain data.
3Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired file number.
4Press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the load, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the load, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you choose to execute the load, the
ACCESS lamp lights (in blue on the right-
side panel and in orange in the card slot
section). The ACCESS lamp goes out and a
completion message appears when the data
has been loaded from the SxS memory card.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear
during execution of the load, or as soon as you
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not loaded
from the SxS memory card.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 101) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >All in the setup menu.
2Select [All Preset], and then press the
MENU knob.
3To execute the reset, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the reset, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you choose to execute the reset, all settings
in the ALL file are reset to preset values.
Error message Problem What to do
NG:Cannot Save No recordable
media is
inserted.
Insert
recordable
media.
NG:Media Full The media is
full.
Use media with
free capacity
remaining.
Loading Setting Data
Error message Problem What to do
NG:No Data • There is no
readable media
•The specified
file does not
exist on the
media
Insert the
media that
contains the
file you want.
Resetting a File after Changing Its
Contents
Saving and Loading Scene Files 149
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Scene files allow you to save the following types
of data.
• Values set in the PAINT menu
• Shutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS
mode
• White balance data
The data that is saved and loaded depends on the
setting of FILE >Reference >Scene White Data
in the setup menu.
To save a scene file to an SxS memory card, insert
the card into a left-side memory card slot and then
proceed as follows.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 101) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >Scene in the setup menu.
To assign a name to the data before saving
it
Assign a name before proceeding to step 2.
For details, see “To assign names to files”
(page 148).
2Select Scene Store Mem or Scene Store
SxS.
Select Scene Store Mem if you want to save
the data in the camcorder’s internal memory,
and select Scene Store SxS if you want to
save the data on an SxS memory card.
3Press the MENU knob.
A list box of scene files appears.
File numbers where “No File” is displayed
are empty file numbers
4Select the file number under which you
want to save the data, and then press the
MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the save, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the save, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you selected Scene Store SxS in step 2, the
ACCESS lamp lights when you execute the
save (in blue on the right-side panel and in
orange in the card slot section).
When the data has been saved to the SxS
memory card, a completion message appears
and the ACCESS lamp goes out.
To load a scene file from an SxS memory card,
insert the SxS memory card into a left-side
memory card slot, and then proceed as follows.
See “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 101) for
information about menu operations.
1Select FILE >Scene in the setup menu.
2Select Scene Recall Mem or Scene
Recall SxS.
Select Scene Recall Mem if you want to load
the file from the camcorder’s internal
memory, and select Scene Recall (SxS) if
you want to load the file from an SxS
memory card.
3Press the MENU knob.
A list box of scene files appears. File
numbers where “No File” is displayed are
empty file numbers.
4Select the desired file number, and then
press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears.
5To execute the load, select [Execute],
and then press the MENU knob.
To cancel the load, select [Cancel], and
then press the MENU knob.
If you selected Scene Recall SxS in step 2,
the ACCESS lamp lights when you execute
the load (in blue on the right-side panel and
in orange in the card slot section).
When the data has been loaded from the SxS
memory card, a completion message appears
and the ACCESS lamp goes out.
Saving and Loading
Scene Files
Saving Scene Files
Loading Scene Files
Saving and Loading Scene Files
150
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Note
The settings data (ALL file, scene file, reference file) of
this camcorder and the PMW-350 are not compatible.
Connecting External Monitors 151
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
You can connect an RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit and operate this camcorder. For connection and
operation of the RM-B150/B750, refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD-ROM (labeled “Manuals for
Solid-State Memory 3D Camcorder”).
Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected.
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the
same status information and menus can be
displayed on the external monitor as those on the
viewfinder screen.
Note
SD signals down-converted for output have the
following restrictions:
Images of 50P/50i/25P are output as PAL signals, those
of 59.94P/59.94i/29.97P are output as NTSC signals, and
those of 23.98P are output as 2-3 pulled-down NTSC
signals.
Chapter8
Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitors
HDMI cable (not supplied)
BNC cable (not supplied)
BNC cable (not supplied)
Connecting External Monitors
152
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
HD/SD SDI OUT connectors (BNC)
The two HD/SD SDI OUT connectors (left and
right) can be used to connect to a monitor,
switcher, VTR, or other recording device that
supports SDI. They can output 3D or 2D signals.
In 3D output mode, the left and right signals are
output independently from the left and right
connectors. In addition, the HD/SD SDI OUT (L)
connector supports 3G-SDI, and can output both
left and right signals. HD SDI side-by-side output
is also supported using either the left or right
connector.
The output signal from these connectors can be
turned on or off using OPERATION >Output
>SDI Output(L) and SDI Output(R) in the setup
menu. Also, the output format from these
connectors can be set using OPERATION
>Output >SDI Signal(L) and SDI Signal(R) in the
setup menu.
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
HDMI connector
The HDMI connector can be used to connect to a
monitor, VTR, or other recording device that
supports HDMI. It can output 3D or 2D signals.
3D signals are output in side-by-side format. If a
monitor that does not support 3D is connected,
the left side images are displayed.
The output from this connector can be turned on
and off using OPERATION >Output >HDMI
Output in the setup menu (see page 106). The
output format from this connector can be set using
OPERATION >Output >HDMI Signal in the
setup menu.
For connection, use an HDMI cable (not
supplied).
VIDEO OUT connector
The VIDEO OUT connector can be used to
connect to a monitor, VTR, or other recording
device that supports analog composite signals. It
can output 2D signals.
The output signal from this connector varies
depending on the setting of OPERATION
>Output >Signal Format in the setup menu. When
OPERATION >Output >Signal Format is set to
SD, an analog composite signal matching the
output signal from the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector is output (the output signal is encoded
in NTSC or PAL according to the setting of
OPERATION >Format >Country in the setup
menu (see page 104)). When OPERATION
>Output >Signal Format is set to HD, a Y-format
signal matching the output signal from the HD/
SD SDI OUT connector is output.
To input the VIDEO OUT connector output
signal to an external analog composite device, it
may be necessary to change the input signal
setting of that external device to be matched with
the analog composite signal setting for the
VIDEO OUT connector.
To input camcorder output audio to an external
device such as a monitor or VTR or other
recording device, connect the audio output of the
AUDIO OUT connector to the audio input of that
external device.
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
Operating Clips with a Computer 153
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with
this camcorder can be controlled on a computer or
edited using the optional nonlinear editing
software.
For these purposes, the clips on an SxS memory
card can be operated by directly loading the card
in a computer or by connecting the camcorder or
the optional SBAC-US10 SxS Memory Card
USB Reader/Writer to the computer, using an
USB cable as shown below.
If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard/
34 or ExpressCard/54 slot, you can directly insert
the SxS memory card containing clips recorded
with this camcorder and access to the files.
For the operating requirements for the computer, see
“Using the Software” (page 17).
Note
The SxS Device Driver Software and SxS UDF driver
software on the CD-ROM supplied with the camcorder
must be installed on your computer. Before installation,
be sure to read the enclosed SxS Device Driver Software
End-User License Agreement.
For information on installation of the driver
software, refer to the ReadMe on the supplied CD-
ROM.
For support information for the driver software, visit
the following URL:
http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/
With a Windows computer
Check that a Removable Disk appears in My
Computer. This indicates normal status.
With a Macintosh computer
An icon is displayed on the menu bar.
Preparations
When you connect the camcorder to a computer
using a USB cable (not supplied), the memory
cards in the left slots are acknowledged as
extended drives by the computer.
When memory cards are inserted in left slots A
and B, they are acknowledged as two independent
extended drives by the computer.
Notes
• When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be
careful to check the form and direction of the PC
connector.
• The camcorder does not work on the bus power from
the computer.
To start USB connection
When you connect a computer to the USB
connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the
message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to
prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the
USB connection.
If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE down to the ESCAPE
Operating Clips with a
Computer
Using the ExpressCard Slot of a
Computer
SxS PRO 8GB
To the ExpressCard slot
SxS memory card Computer with SxS
Device Driver
Software installed
USB Connection with a Computer
USB cable
(not supplied)
Operating Clips with a Computer
154
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
side or if you disconnect the USB cable, the
message “Connect USB Now?” disappears.
If you select “Execute” and press the MENU
knob, the USB connection is enabled and this
camcorder is recognized as an extension drive.
You can carry out the same operations by using
the arrow buttons (J, j, K, k) (see page 28).
If the USB connection is enabled during
recording/playback operation, the operation is
stopped and the message “USB Connecting”
appears on the viewfinder screen.
At this time, the output signal from the VIDEO
OUT connector, HDMI connector, and HD/SD
SDI OUT connector changes to a black signal.
Notes
• The camcorder cannot be operated for recording,
playback, and so on while the message “USB
Connecting” is displayed.
• When the computer accesses the media loaded in the
camcorder, do not try to carry out the following
operations.
- Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/off,
switching the operation mode, etc.)
- Removing or loading a media from an active slot
(being accessed from the computer)
- Removing or connecting the USB cable
Disabling the USB connection
To disable the USB connection, follow the same
procedure as that for removing a device from the
computer.
To enable the USB connection again, first
disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it.
The message “Connect USB Now?” appears
again.
To remove an SxS memory card
Windows
1Click on the icon of “Safely Remove
Hardware” on the task bar of the
computer.
2Select “Safely remove SxS Memory
Card - Drive(X:)” from the displayed
menu.
3Check that the Safe To Remove
Hardware message appears then
remove the card.
Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to
Trash.
If the SxS memory card icon is located on Finder,
click on the eject icon on its side.
To use the supplied application software
To copy clips to the local disk of your computer
and perform other management tasks, install the
application software on the supplied CD-ROM.
Install the application software on the supplied
CD-ROM to your computer.
Although the data regarding recorded materials
are stored over multiple files and folders, you can
easily handle the clips without considering such
data and directory structure by using the
application software.
Note
If you operate, e.g. copy the clips on the SxS memory
card by using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder
(Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips
may not be maintained. To avoid such a problem, use the
application software.
For the operating requirements, installation and
operations, refer to the “XDCAM EX web sites”
(page 12) or User’s Guide contained in the CD-
ROM.
For support information on the application software,
visit the web sites shown in “XDCAM EX web sites”
(page 12) or on the cover page of the supplied CD-
ROM.
Editing 3D Clips using MPES-3D01 155
Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices
To use a nonlinear editing system
For a nonlinear editing system, optional editing
software that corresponds to the recording
formats used with this camcorder is required.
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your
computer in advance, using the supplied
application software.
Some editing software may not operate properly.
Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to
the recording formats used with this camcorder.
You can adjust, convert, or perform other image
processing functions on 3D clips shot by the
camcorder using MPES-3D01 Stereo Image
Processor software. To edit using MPES-3D01
software, connect the HD/SD SDI OUT
connector of the camcorder to the input connector
of an MPE-200 Multi Image Processor running
MPES-3D01 software, using a BNC cable (sold
separately).
Editing 3D Clips using
MPES-3D01
Testing the Camcorder / Maintenance
156
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Check the functions of the camcorder before
setting out for a shooting session, preferably by
recording and playing back video and audio
signals. Use a dust blower to clean the lens, the LCD
screen, and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Note
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.
Chapter9Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder Maintenance
Cleaning the Viewfinder
Note about the Battery Terminal
Adjusting Left/Right Lens Errors 157
Chapter 9 Maintenance
If any errors occur between the left and right
lenses, you can adjust the right lens to minimize
the differences between it and the left lens. The
following parameters are adjustable.
• Vertical optical axis
• Zoom (focal length)
• Focus
•Iris
The camcorder provides two correction methods:
a single-point correction method when shooting
and a slower multi-point correction method.
Note
Subjecting the camcorder to severe shocks may cause
longitudinal errors in the left and right images.
This method corrects the left/right lens error at a
single point.
1Press and hold the Shift button, and
then press the ASSIGN. 6 switch.
Or select OPERATION >Lens
Adjust(R) in the setup menu.
The camcorder switches to LENS ADJUST
mode.
2Select the parameter (vertical optical
axis, zoom, focus, iris) to adjust using
the MENU knob, and then press the
MENU knob.
The display switches to the adjustment
screen for the selected parameter and
displays the correction value on the bottom
of the screen.
3Adjust the setting by turning the
MENU knob, and then press the MENU
knob.
4After adjusting each parameter, press
the MENU knob.
The adjustment settings are saved.
This method corrects the zoom, focus, and other
parameters at multiple points while changing the
iris position.
Adjusting
1Select MAINTENANCE >Lens >Start
Config in the setup menu.
2Select the parameter to adjust (zoom,
focus, iris, vertical axis) by turning the
MENU knob, and then press the MENU
knob.
This description describes an example of
adjusting the vertical axis parameter.
The display switches to the adjustment
screen and displays a vertical optical axis
point (P1 to P10) and its correction value on
the bottom of the screen.
3Rotate the ZOOM dial and adjust the
zoom to the desired position.
The correction point display on the bottom of
the screen automatically updates as the zoom
position changes.
4Turn the MENU knob, while watching
the screen, and adjust the setting until
the vertical axis error disappears.
Turning the MENU knob adjusts the right
lens image only.
5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the zoom
for other points as desired.
6After adjusting for all points, press the
MENU knob.
The vertical axis correction values are fixed,
and the display returns to the Start Config
screen.
7Select other parameters you wish to
correct using the MENU knob, and
repeat the same procedure.
Adjusting Left/Right
Lens Errors
Correcting at a Single Point
Correcting at Multiple Points
Correction point
Correction value
Adjusting Left/Right Lens Errors
158
Chapter 9 Maintenance
To cancel
Hold down CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE on the
CANCEL/PRST side of the switch to cancel the
correction function.
Clearing the correction values
Select MAINTENANCE >Lens >Clear Config
>Execute in the setup menu.
The correction values for all parameters are
cleared.
Checking the correction values
Select MAINTENANCE >Lens >Config Status
in the setup menu, and then select the parameter
to check.
The correction values for each point for the
selected parameter are displayed. Rotate the
MENU knob to scroll the display.
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you
zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the
flange focal length (the distance from the plane of
the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane).
When carrying out the adjustment, use the
supplied flange focal length adjustment chart as
the subject.
Notes
• Subjecting the camcorder to severe shocks and large
temperature variations may result in flange back
errors.
• If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move
the camcorder or subject during adjustment, this will
cause an adjustment error.
• Place the subject (the flange focal length adjustment
chart) so that it appears at the center of the screen at the
telephoto end. Arrange so that no nearby object (no
object closer to the camera than the chart) enters the
screen at the wide-angle end.
Carrying out the adjustment
With the camcorder, zoom and focus operations
automatically adjust the flange focal length.
1Open the iris, position the supplied
flange focal length adjustment chart
approximately 3 meters (10 ft) away
from the camcorder, and arrange the
lighting to obtain a satisfactory video
output.
2Select MAINTENANCE >Lens >Auto
FB Adjust >Execute in the setup menu.
The flange focal length adjustment starts.
During adjustment
The message “AUTO FB Adjust
EXECUTING” appears on the viewfinder
screen.
If the adjustment completes correctly
The message on the viewfinder screen
changes to “Auto FB Adjust: OK”.
If the flange focal length adjustment does
not complete correctly
Check the subject and lighting conditions,
and repeat the adjustment.
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length
About 3 m (10 ft)
Operation Warnings 159
Chapter 9 Maintenance
If a problem occurs when the camcorder is powered or is being operated, a warning is issued by various
visible and audible indicators. These visible and audible indicators are:
• Error/warning message (“A” in the “Layout of the table of warning messages” below)
• WARNING indicator (“B”), warning sound from the speaker and earphones (“C”), tally/REC indication
(“D”), and battery remaining indicator (“E”).
A warning message, and the REC indication appear on the viewfinder screen.
The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted with the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to the
minimum position to suppress the sound.
Layout of the table of warning messages
• The operation of the WARNING indicator, the tally/REC indication, and the battery indicator is
represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous
: 1 flash/s
: 4 flashes/s
• The warning sounds are represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous beep
: 1 beep/s
Operation Warnings
A
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
BC D E
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Error Indication
E-*****
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
——
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The camcorder is
abnormal.
Recording stops. Turn off the power and confirm whether an error
occurs on the connected devices, the cables, and
the media or not.
(If power cannot be turned off by setting the
POWER switch to OFF, remove the battery pack
or the AC power source.)
If the problem continues after the camcorder is
restarted, contact your Sony service
representative.
Operation Warnings
160
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Warning Indication
Media Near Full (Left/Right)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Free space on the SxS
memory card has
become insufficient.
In 3D mode, this
calculates the
remaining capacity
based on the memory
required for 3D
recording and displays
a warning for active
slots.
Recording continues. Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity.
Media Full (Left/Right)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
No space is left on the
SxS memory card.
Recording and clip
copying cannot be
performed.
In 3D mode, this
calculates the
remaining capacity
based on the memory
required for 3D
recording and displays
a warning for active
slots.
Recording stops. Replace it with another.
Battery Near End
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The battery power will
be exhausted soon.
Recording continues. Charge the battery pack at the earliest
opportunity.
Operation Warnings 161
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Battery End
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The battery pack is
exhausted. Recording
cannot be performed.
Recording stops. Connect a power source via the DC IN connector
or stop operation to charge the battery pack.
Temperature High
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The internal
temperature has risen
above a safe operation
limit.
Recording continues. Suspend operation, turn off the power, and wait
until the temperature falls.
Voltage Low
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The DC IN voltage has
become low (stage 1).
Recording continues. Check the power supply.
Insufficient Voltage
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The DC IN voltage is
too low (stage 2).
Recording cannot be
performed.
Recording stops. Connect other power source.
Battery Error
Please Change Battery.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
An error was detected
with the battery pack.
Recording stops. Replace the battery pack with a normal one.
Backup Battery End
Please Change.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The remaining power
of the backup battery
is insufficient.
Recording continues. Refer to a Sony service representative to replace
the battery with a new one.
Operation Warnings
162
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Unknown Media(A)1)
Please Change.
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
A partitioned memory
card or one that
contains recorded clips
exceeding the number
permitted with this
camcorder is loaded.
Recording continues. This card cannot be used with this camcorder.
Remove it and load a compatible card.
Reached Clip Number Limit
Cannot Record to Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The maximum number
of clips for a single
memory card is
reached. No more clip
can be recorded on the
card.
Recording stops. Replace it with another card.
Media Error
Media(A)1) Needs to be Restored
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
An error occurred with
the memory card. The
card requires
restoration.
Recording stops. Remove the card, load it again, and restore it.
Media Error
Cannot Record to Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Recording cannot be
done, as the memory
card is defective.
Recording stops. As playback may be possible, it is recommended
to replace it with another card after copying the
clips, as required.
Media Error
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Neither recording nor
playback can be done,
as the memory card is
defective.
Recording stops. It cannot be operated with this camcorder.
Replace it with another card.
Operation Warnings 163
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
Unsupported File System
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
A card of a different
file system was
inserted.
Recording stops. It cannot be used with this camcorder. Replace it
with another card.
Media Error
Playback Halted
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
An error occurred in
reading data from the
memory card, and
playback cannot be
continued.
Recording stops. If this frequently occurs, change the memory card
after copying the clips, as required.
Media(A)1) Error
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Recording cannot be
done, as an error
occurred with the
memory card.
Recording stops. If this frequently occurs, change the memory
card.
Not Enough Capacity
Change Media (A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
There is not enough
capacity for copying.
Recording continues
(disallowing copy).
Replace the card in slot A with another one.
Reached Duplication Limit
Change Media (A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The card has already
ten clips having the
same name as that you
tried to duplicate.
Recording continues
(disallowing copy).
Replace the card in slot A with another one.
Will Switch Slots Soon
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
Will switch to other
slot soon.
Recording continues. Make sure that a memory card is loaded in the
other slot.
Operation Warnings
164
Chapter 9 Maintenance
No Clip
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
There is no clip to be
displayed.
Recording continues. —
No OK Clip
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
There is no clip with
the OK mark.
Recording continues. —
Same File Already Exists
Change Media(A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The card has already
clips having the same
name as that you tried
to duplicate.
Recording continues
(disallowing copy).
Replace the card in slot A with another one.
Media Reached Rewriting Limit
Change Media (A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The memory card
comes to the end of its
service life.
Recording stops. Make a backup copy and replace the card with
another one as soon as possible. Recording/
playback may not be performed properly if you
continue to use the card.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of
the memory card.
Unsupported Clip Included
Cannot Use Media (A)1)
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— — —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
The inserted memory
card contains clips
recorded in a format
that is not supported
by this camcorder.
— The card in slot A cannot be used with this
camcorder.
Operation Warnings 165
Chapter 9 Maintenance
1) (B) for the card in slot B
Record Only Left/Right Side
WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally/REC Battery remaining
—— —
Problem Operation in the recorder
module
Action to take
In 3D mode, clips are
recording to memory
cards on one side only.
Recording continues. Insert recordable media in slots on both sides, as
required.
Important Notes on Operation
166
Appendix
Use and storage
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks
• The dual, fixed lens system is designed with
very high precision. Do not subject to severe
shocks.
• The internal mechanism may be damaged or the
body warped.
• If an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe
is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using it
and contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative.
Do not cover the camcorder while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the camcorder
can cause excessive internal heat build-up.
After use
Always turn off the POWER switch.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
Shipping
• Remove the media before transporting the
camcorder.
• If sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air or
other transportation service, pack it in the
shipping carton of the camcorder.
Care of the camcorder
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the
lenses or optical filters using a blower.
If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it with
a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth
steeped in a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry.
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or
thinners, as these may cause discoloration or
other damage to the finish of the camcorder.
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the
camcorder, contact a Sony service representative.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
storing the camcorder in the following places.
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F))
• Remember that in summer in warm climates the
temperature inside a car with the windows
closed can easily exceed 50 °C (122 °F).
• In damp or dusty locations
• Locations where the camcorder may be exposed
to rain
• Locations subject to violent vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
To prevent electromagnetic interference from
portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this camcorder can
result in malfunctions and interference with audio
and video signals.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this camcorder be
powered off.
Note on laser beams
Laser beams may damage the CMOS image
sensors.
If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be
careful not to let the laser beam be directed into
the lens of the camcorder.
Viewfinder
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece
pointing directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays
and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
Appendix
Important Notes on
Operation
Important Notes on Operation 167
Appendix
About the LCD panels
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured
with high precision technology, giving a
functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a
very small proportion of pixels maybe “stuck”,
either always off (black), always on (red, green,
or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long
period of use, because of the physical
characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such
“stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These
problems are not a malfunction. Note that any
such problems have no effect on recorded data.
Phenomena specific to CMOS image
sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors.
They do not indicate malfunctions.
White flecks
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is related
to the principle of CMOS image sensors and is
not a malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following cases:
• when operating at a high environmental
temperature
• when you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode
The problem may be alleviated by executing
automatic black balance adjustment.
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
Flicker
If recording is made under lighting produced by
discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or
mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,
colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear
distorted.
In such cases, set the flicker-reduction function to
auto mode (2D mode only) (see page 136).
If the frame rate selected for recording is close to
the power-supply frequency, flicker may not be
reduced sufficiently even if you activate the
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the
electronic shutter.
Focal plane
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup
elements (CMOS image sensors) for reading
video signals, subjects that quickly move across
the screen may appear slightly skewed.
Flash band
The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen
may change when shooting a flashlight beam or a
light source that quickly flashes.
You can use the supplied application software to
correct clips that contain frames with flash bands.
Note on data compatibility with other
XDCAM EX-series products
When you use a PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 to play
materials recorded on the camcorder, any media
in which clips of formats not supported by the
PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 have been recorded
cannot be used.
The PMW-EX1/EX3/EX30 cannot divide a clip
recorded on this camcorder, even if the clip is in a
video format supported by the PMW-EX1/EX3/
EX30.
Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock
168
Appendix
Fragmentation
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced
properly, try formatting the recording medium.
While repeating picture recording/playback with
a certain recording medium for an extended
period, files in the medium may be fragmented,
disabling proper recording/storage. In such a
case, make a backup of clips in the medium then
perform formatting of the medium using
OPERATION >Format Media (see page 105) in
the setup menu.
The camcorder’s internal clock is powered by a
lithium battery. If the message “BackUp Battery
End” appears in the viewfinder, this battery must
be exchanged. Contact a Sony service
representative.
Exchanging the Battery
of the Internal Clock
Specifications 169
Appendix
Specifications
General
Power requirements
12 V DC (11 V to 17.0 V)
Power consumption
Approx. 32 W
Main unit (camcorder) + LCD viewfinder +
microphone
During recording, power source: battery pack
Notes
• Do not use a video light with power
consumption of over 50 W.
• When connecting a device to the DC OUT
connector, use one with current consumption
of 0.5 A or more.
Operating temperature
0 ºC to 40 ºC (32 ºF to 104 ºF)
Storage temperature
–20 ºC to +60 ºC (–4 ºF to 140 ºF)
Recording/playback formats
Video
HD HQ Mode: MPEG-2 MP@HL, 35 Mbps/
VBR
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
HD SP Mode: MPEG-2 MP@H-14, 25 Mbps/
CBR
1440 × 1080 /59.94i, 50i
Audio
LPCM (16 bits, 48 kHz, 4 channels)
Recording/playback time
With one SBP-16
SP mode: Approx. 70 min.
HQ mode: Approx. 50 min.
With one SBP-32 or SBS-32G1A
SP mode: Approx.140 min.
HQ mode: Approx. 100 min.
With one SBS-64G1A
SP mode: Approx. 280 min.
HQ mode: Approx. 200 min.
Note
The actual recording/playback time may differ
slightly from the values shown here, depending
on usage conditions, memory characteristics,
etc.
Continuous operation time
With the BP-GL95A
Approx. 170 min.
Mass
5.5 kg (12 lb 2 oz)
Camcorder + LCD viewfinder + microphone +
lens hood
Dimensions
See page 172.
Supplied accessories
See page 171.
Camera Block
Pickup device
1/2-type, CMOS image sensor × 2
Effective picture elements: 1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
Format
3-chip RGB
Optical system
F1.6 prism system
ND filters
1: Clear
2: 1/4ND
3: 1/16ND
4: 1/64ND
Sensitivity
F10 (System frequency: 59.94i)
F11 (System frequency: 50i)
(2000 lx, 89.9% reflection)
Minimum illumination
0.133 lx (F2.6, +24 dB, 64-frame accumulation)
Specifications
170
Appendix
Viewfinder (supplied)
Input/Output connectors
Video S/N
54 dB
Horizontal resolution
1000TV lines or more
Gain
–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24 dB, AGC
Shutter speed
59.94i/P, 50i/P: 1/60 to 1/2000 sec.
29.97P: 1/40 to 1/2000 sec.
25P: 1/33 to 1/2000 sec.
23.94P: 1/32 to 1/2000 sec.
Slow shutter
2 to 8 frames (3D mode)
2 to 8, 16, 32, 64 frames (2D mode)
Audio Block
Sampling frequency
48 kHz
Quantization
16 bits
Headroom
20 dB (the factory default setting)
(20, 18, 16, 12 dB)
Frequency response
MIC: 50 Hz to 20 kHz (within ±3 dB)
LINE: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (within ±3 dB)
WRR Analog: 50 Hz to 20 kHz (within ±3 dB)
WRR Digital: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (within ±3 dB)
Dynamic range
90 dB (typical)
Distortion
0.08% max. (with input level 40 dBu)
Built-in speaker
Monaural
Output: 300 mW
Display
Screen size
8.8 cm diagonal (3.5-inch)
Aspect ratio
16:9
Picture elements
854 (H) × 3 × 480 (V)
Media Block
Card slots
Type: Express Card34
Number of slots: 4
Connector: Conforms to PCMCIA Express Card
Standard
Writing rate
50 Mbps or more
Reading rate
50 Mbps or more
Inputs/Outputs
Signal inputs
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2: XLR type, 3-pin, female
–60 dBu/–4 dBu (0 dBu=0.775 Vrms)
MIC IN: XLR type, 5-pin, female
–60 dBu
GENLOCK IN: BNC type
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced
TC IN: BNC type
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ
Signal outputs
VIDEO OUT: BNC type
HDMI: Type A, 19-pin
HD/SD SDI OUT(L): BNC type,
Dual stream output compatible
HD/SD SDI OUT(R): BNC type
AUDIO OUT: XLR type, 5-pin, male
0 dBu
TC OUT: BNC type
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
EARPHONE (stereo minijack)
8Ω, –∞ to –18 dBs variable
Specifications 171
Appendix
Power supply and related equipment
Viewfinder and Related Equipment
Note
The BKW-401 can be used with the CBK-VF01 and
DXF-20W viewfinders, as well as the supplied
viewfinder.
Others
DC IN: XLR type, 4-pin, male
11 to 17 V DC
DC OUT: 4-pin
11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current:
0.5 A
REMOTE: 8-pin
LIGHT: 2-pin
USB: 4-pin
VF: 26-pin, rectangular, 20-pin round
For wireless receiver: D-sub 15-pin
REMOTE FOCUS: 6-pin
REMOTE ZOOM: 8-pin
REMOTE CONVEGEENCE: 7-pin
Lens Block
Focal length
7.5 mm (5/16 inches) to 52.5 mm (2 1/8 inches)
(equivalent to 40.6 mm (1 5/8 inches) to 284 mm
(11 1/4 inches) on 35 mm (1 7/16 inches) lens)
Zoom
Auto/Manual selectable
Zoom ratio
7×
Maximum relative aperture
1:2.6
Iris
Auto/Manual selectable
F2.6 to F16 and C (close)
Focus
Auto/Manual selectable
Ranges: 0.9 m (35 1/2 inches) to ∞
Inter-Axial Distance (IAD)
45 mm (1 13/16 inches) (fixed)
Convergence distance
Approx. 1.2 m (4 ft) (lens surface reference) to
∞ (infinity)
Filter thread
M105 mm, pitch 1 mm
Supplied Accessories
Viewfinder (1)
Viewfinder hood (1)
Shoulder strap (1)
Stereo microphone (1)
Wind screen (1)
Cold shoe kit (1 set)
Lens hood (1)
Lens cap (1)
Flange back adjustment chart
Operating Instructions
English version (1)
CD-ROM
- Utility Software for XDCAM (application
software, device driver software)
- Manuals for Solid-State Memory 3D
Camcorder (PDF Operating Instructions and
Supplement) (1)
Recommended Additional
Equipment
AC Adaptor
AC-DN10/DN2B
Battery Pack
BP-GL95A/L80S/L60S
Battery Charger
BC-L160/L500/L70
Viewfinder
CBK-VF01
DXF-20W/51/C50W
Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
BKW-401
Specifications
172
Appendix
Equipment for remote control
Media
Audio equipment
Other peripheral devices
Equipment for maintenance and easier handling
Dimensions
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Remote Control Unit
RM-B150/B750
RCP-1000/1500/1530
RCP-751/921
RCP-1001/1501
Note
The command network unit (CNU) is not
supported.
Wi-Fi Adapter
CBK-WA01
SxS Memory Card
SxS PRO SBP-16 (16 GB)
SxS PRO SBP-32 (32 GB)
SxS-1 SBS-32G1A (32 GB)
SxS-1 SBS-64G1A (64 GB)
Media Adaptor
MEAD-MS01 (for “Memory Stick PRO-HG
Duo HX” series)
MEAD-SD01 (for SDHC card)
Mobile Storage Unit
PXU-MS240
Microphone
ECM-678/674/673/680S
Microphone Holder
CAC-12
Wireless Microphone
DWR-S01D
WRR-855S/860C/861/862
Tripod adaptor
VCT-14/U14
Video Light
UC-D200A (PROTECH)
Ultralight (Anton Bauer)
Pad
CBK-SP01 Soft Type Shoulder Pad
Hard Carrying Case
LC-H300
Soft Carrying Case
LC-DS300SFT
Maintenance Manual
Notes
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it was
recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING
MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR
ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS
TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating properly
before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE
LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE
PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT,
EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD
OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON
WHATSOEVER.
(in mm (inches))
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories 173
Appendix
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories
a) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with microphone mounted. However, remove
the microphone if it protrudes more than 25 cm (9 7/8 inches) from the front of the main unit.
ECM-680S/678/
674/673
Microphone
CAC-12
Microphone Holder
DXF-51 Viewfinder
HD monitor/SD monitor
XDCAM HD series recorder
PDW-F1600/HD1500, PDW-F75
HDCAM series recorder
HDW-2000 series recorder, HDW-S280
WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
WRR-860C/861/862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
PMW-TD300
RM-B150/B750
RCP-751/921
RCP-1001/1501
Remote Control Unit
VCT-14/U14
Tripod adaptor
Tripod
LC-DS300 SFT a)
Soft carrying case AC-DN10/DN2B
AC Adaptor
BC-L500 Battery
Charger
BC-M150
Battery
Charger
BC-L70
Battery
Charger
BP-GL95A/L80S/L60S
Battery Pack
SBP-16/32
SBS-32G1A/64G1A
SxS memory card
MPE-200 Multi Image Processor
+ MPES-3D01 Stereo Image Processor
LC-H300
Hard carrying case
DXF-20W
Viewfinder
MEAD-MS01, MEAD-SD01 Media Adaptor
PXU-MS240 Mobile Storage Unit
DXF-C50W
Viewfinder
HDFA-200
Optical Fiber Adaptor
CBK-VF01
Viewfinder
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License / About Bitmap Fonts
174
Appendix
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206.
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage
media storing MPEG-2 video information such as
DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general
consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the
PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for
their own business from MPEG LA. Please
contact MPEG LA for any further information.
MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206
http://www.mpegla.com
This product uses RICOH Bitmap Fonts
produced and sold by Ricoh Company, Ltd.
MPEG-2 Video Patent
Portfolio License
About Bitmap Fonts
About OpenSSL 175
Appendix
Because it uses the OpenSSL Toolkit, this product uses software developed by the OpenSSL Project
(http://www.openssl.org/).
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
About OpenSSL
About OpenSSL
176
Appendix
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
About OpenSSL 177
Appendix
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
*
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
*
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
*
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
Index
178
Index
Numerics
2D 52
3D 52
3D depth warning 87
3D shooting guide 87
A
AC power 38
ACCESS lamps 26, 29
Accessories (optional) 173
Accessory fitting shoe 19
ALARM knob 24
Application software 154
Area setting 44
Arrow buttons (K, k, J, j) 28
ASSIGN. 0 switch 24
ASSIGN. 1/2/3 switches 23
ASSIGN. 6 switch 21
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches 29
Assignable switches, assigning functions 142
ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) 25
Audio control section 27
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 31
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4
switches 28
AUDIO IN selectors 31
Audio input system 45
Audio level
adjusting 63
adjusting playback level 24
meters 36
AUDIO OUT connector 31
AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches 28
AUTO CONVERGENCE button 21, 62
Auto focus 60
AUTO W/B BAL switch 23
B
BACKLIGHT button 27
Battery
attachment shoe 18
of the internal clock, exchanging 168
pack 37
remaining 34
BKW-401 41
Black balance, adjusting 53
BRIGHT control 32
C
Clip(s)
batch copy 96
copying 96
cue up 92
defining names 85
deleting 77, 97
displaying properties 95
operating with a computer 153
operations 89
playing 76, 91
selecting 91
Clock setting 45
Color LCD 26
COLOR TEMP. button 23
Color temperature 34
Computer, connecting 153
Connection 151
computer 153
monitors 151
using USB 153
CONTRAST control 32
CONVERGENCE dial 21, 61
Convergence distance 36
Convergence point 14
Cover 25
D
Date, setting 45
DC IN connector 18
DC OUT 12V connector 18
DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control) 24
Depth of field 35
Diopter adjustment ring 32
DISPLAY switches 27, 33
Index
Index 179
Index
E
EARPHONE jack 30
EJECT buttons 29
Electric color temperature filter 36
ESSENCE MARK button 28
EXPAND button 27
EXPAND FOCUS button 20
Expand thumbnail screen
displaying 98
to increase the number of divisions 98
External device connector 29
External devices 151
control 35
External power source 34
Eyecup 32
F
F FWD button/indicator 26
F REV button/indicator 26
Filter position 36
Fitting for optional microphone holder 19
Flange focal length, adjusting 158
Focus
adjusting 60
adjustment mode 35
position 34
FOCUS dial 21, 60
FOCUS switch 22
Frame Rec 80
Framing shots 83
Freeze Mix 83
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch 28
G
GAIN selector 24
Gain value 36
GENLOCK IN connector 30
Green tally 34
Grid 88
H
HD/SD SDI OUT connector 31
HDMI output connector 29
Histogram 36
HOLD button 27
I
Index picture
changing 99
Initial value 103
Internal clock 45
Interval Rec 79
Iris
position 36
IRIS dial 21
L
LCD panel 26
LEVEL CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 knobs 28
LIGHT connector 19
LIGHT switch 18
M
Maintenance 156
Manual focus 60
Media
remaining capacity 32, 36
status 34
MENU button 28
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch 25
MENU knob 23
MENU ON/OFF switch 25
MF assist function 61
MIC IN (+48 V) connector 19
MIC LEVEL control 23
Microphone holder 33
fitting 19
Microphone, connecting 45
MIRROR switch 33
MONITOR knob 24
MONITOR switches 24
Monitor, connecting 151
Monochrome LCD Panel 31
N
ND filter 21
ND SELECT switch 21
NEXT button 27
Nonlinear editing 155
Number of system lines 34
Index
180
Index
O
OK mark(s) 90, 95
adding 96
deleting 96
setting 77
One-push auto focus 61
Operation status 34
Optional components 173
OUTPUT/DCC switch 24
P
Parallax 15
PEAKING control 32
Picture Cache 78
Planning metadata 84
PLAY/PAUSE button/indicator 26
Plug 32
Power source voltage/battery remaining
capacity 34
Power supply 37
POWER switch 18
Preset values, resetting 148
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch 28
PREV button 26
PUSH AF button 22
R
REC START button 22
Recording
from pre-stored video 78
remaining time 73
review 75
time-lapse video 79
Recording mode 34
special settings indication 35
Recording status 35
REMOTE connector 31
REMOTE CONVERGENCE connector 20
REMOTE FOCUS connector 20
REMOTE ZOOM connector 20
Reset 103, 148
RESET/RETURN button 27
S
Scene files
loading 149
saving 149
Search
with the expand thumbnail screen 92
with the shot mark thumbnail screen 92
SET button 28
Setup menu 100
basic operations 101
FILE menu 140
MAINTENANCE menu 127
menu list 104
OPERATION menu 104
PAINT menu 122
SHIFT button 21, 28
Shooting 70
basic operations 75
stop motion animations 80
with Slow & Quick motion 82
Shot mark thumbnail screen 98
Shot mark(s)
adding 99
adding during playback 92
defining names 86
deleting 99
recording 77
Shoulder pad 19
adjusting the position 50
Shoulder strap fitting 19
Shoulder strap, using 49
Shutter
setting 56
speed 56
SHUTTER selector 22
Slot cover 29
SLOT SELECT button 29
Speaker 26
Specifications 169
Status information 68
STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch 25
Status screens 68
ASSIGN SWITCH 68
AUDIO 68
BATTERY/MEDIA 69
CAMERA 68
VIDEO 68
STOP button 27
Stopper 32
Subject distance range 35
SxS memory card slots 29
SxS memory cards 70
ejecting 72
Index 181
Index
formatting 73
loading 71
restoring 74
selecting 72
T
TALLY indicators 30
Tally indicators 32
TALLY switch 30, 32
TC IN connector 30
TC OUT connector 30
Testing 156
THUMBNAIL button 27
THUMBNAIL indicator 27
THUMBNAIL menu 93
operations 94
Thumbnail screen 89
displaying OK clip thumbnails only 94
displaying the all clips thumbnail 94
Thumbnail(s)
changing the screen type 94
operations 93
Time, setting 45
Timecode 35
setting 65
synchronizing 66
TLCS automatic adjustment 58
TLCS control mode 35
Tripod mount 19
Tripod, mounting 48
U
UHF portable tuner, attaching 47
USB connection 153
USB connector 29
User bits setting 66
User setting data
loading 148
saving 147
V
VF connector (20-pin, round) 19
VF connector (26-pin, rectangular) 19
VF DISPLAY SELECT switch 21
Video format 35, 95
setting 51
Video level indication 35
Video light, connecting 49
VIDEO OUT connector 30
Viewfinder 32
adjusting focus 41
adjusting position 39
adjusting screen 41
adjusting the angle 39
attaching 38
attaching a 5-inch viewfinder 43
cable 33
changing display 62
cleaning 156
connectors 19
fitting shoe 19
hood 41
positioning knob 19
positioning lever 19
positioning ring 19
raising up the barrel and eyepiece 39
screen display 33
Voltage capacity 34
W
WARNING indicator 26
Warnings 159
WHITE BAL switch 24
White balance memory 36
White balance, adjusting 54
Wi-Fi adapter 29
Wireless microphone reception level 34
Write protect 32, 71
X
XDCAM EX web sites 12
Z
ZEBRA switch 32
Zoom 59
position 34
ZOOM dial 21, 59

Navigation menu